OpenCores
URL https://opencores.org/ocsvn/openrisc/openrisc/trunk

Subversion Repositories openrisc

[/] [openrisc/] [trunk/] [gnu-stable/] [binutils-2.20.1/] [gas/] [doc/] [as.texinfo] - Blame information for rev 843

Go to most recent revision | Details | Compare with Previous | View Log

Line No. Rev Author Line
1 205 julius
\input texinfo @c                               -*-Texinfo-*-
2
@c  Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
3
@c  2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009
4
@c  Free Software Foundation, Inc.
5
@c UPDATE!!  On future updates--
6
@c   (1)   check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
7
@c         md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
8
@c   (2)   for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
9
@c         in config/tc-*.c
10
@c   (3)   for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
11
@c         in config/obj-*.c
12
@c   (4)   portable directives in potable[] in read.c
13
@c %**start of header
14
@setfilename as.info
15
@c ---config---
16
@macro gcctabopt{body}
17
@code{\body\}
18
@end macro
19
@c defaults, config file may override:
20
@set have-stabs
21
@c ---
22
@c man begin NAME
23
@c ---
24
@include asconfig.texi
25
@include bfdver.texi
26
@c ---
27
@c man end
28
@c ---
29
@c common OR combinations of conditions
30
@ifset COFF
31
@set COFF-ELF
32
@end ifset
33
@ifset ELF
34
@set COFF-ELF
35
@end ifset
36
@ifset AOUT
37
@set aout-bout
38
@end ifset
39
@ifset ARM/Thumb
40
@set ARM
41
@end ifset
42
@ifset BOUT
43
@set aout-bout
44
@end ifset
45
@ifset H8/300
46
@set H8
47
@end ifset
48
@ifset SH
49
@set H8
50
@end ifset
51
@ifset HPPA
52
@set abnormal-separator
53
@end ifset
54
@c ------------
55
@ifset GENERIC
56
@settitle Using @value{AS}
57
@end ifset
58
@ifclear GENERIC
59
@settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
60
@end ifclear
61
@setchapternewpage odd
62
@c %**end of header
63
 
64
@c @smallbook
65
@c @set SMALL
66
@c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
67
@c instructions.  Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
68
@c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
69
@c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
70
@c
71
@c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
72
@c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
73
@c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
74
@c break.
75
@c
76
@c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
77
@c not well for the default large-page format.  This manual expects that if you
78
@c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
79
@c tables in question.  You can turn on one without the other at your
80
@c discretion, of course.
81
@ifinfo
82
@set SMALL
83
@c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
84
@c might as well show 'em anyways.
85
@end ifinfo
86
 
87
@ifinfo
88
@format
89
START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
90
* As: (as).                     The GNU assembler.
91
* Gas: (as).                    The GNU assembler.
92
END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
93
@end format
94
@end ifinfo
95
 
96
@finalout
97
@syncodeindex ky cp
98
 
99
@copying
100
This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
 
102
@c man begin COPYRIGHT
103
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001, 2002,
104
2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
105
 
106
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
107
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
108
or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
109
with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
110
Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
111
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
112
 
113
@c man end
114
@end copying
115
 
116
@titlepage
117
@title Using @value{AS}
118
@subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
119
@ifclear GENERIC
120
@subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
121
@end ifclear
122
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
123
@sp 1
124
@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
125
@end ifset
126
@sp 1
127
@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
128
@sp 1
129
@sp 13
130
The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
131
Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
132
first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
133
The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
134
distracting the boss while they got some work
135
done.
136
@sp 3
137
@author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
138
@page
139
@tex
140
{\parskip=0pt
141
\hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
142
\hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
143
}
144
%"boxit" macro for figures:
145
%Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
146
\gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
147
     \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
148
#2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
149
\gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
150
@end tex
151
 
152
@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
153
Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001, 2002,
154
2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
155
 
156
      Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
157
      under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
158
      or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
159
      with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
160
      Back-Cover Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the
161
      section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
162
 
163
@end titlepage
164
@contents
165
 
166
@ifnottex
167
@node Top
168
@top Using @value{AS}
169
 
170
This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
171
@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
172
@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
173
@end ifset
174
version @value{VERSION}.
175
@ifclear GENERIC
176
This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
177
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
178
@end ifclear
179
 
180
This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
181
Documentation License.  A copy of the license is included in the
182
section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
183
 
184
@menu
185
* Overview::                    Overview
186
* Invoking::                    Command-Line Options
187
* Syntax::                      Syntax
188
* Sections::                    Sections and Relocation
189
* Symbols::                     Symbols
190
* Expressions::                 Expressions
191
* Pseudo Ops::                  Assembler Directives
192
@ifset ELF
193
* Object Attributes::           Object Attributes
194
@end ifset
195
* Machine Dependencies::        Machine Dependent Features
196
* Reporting Bugs::              Reporting Bugs
197
* Acknowledgements::            Who Did What
198
* GNU Free Documentation License::  GNU Free Documentation License
199
* AS Index::                    AS Index
200
@end menu
201
@end ifnottex
202
 
203
@node Overview
204
@chapter Overview
205
@iftex
206
This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
207
@ifclear GENERIC
208
This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
209
code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
210
@end ifclear
211
@end iftex
212
 
213
@cindex invocation summary
214
@cindex option summary
215
@cindex summary of options
216
Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.  For details,
217
see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
218
 
219
@c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
220
 
221
@ignore
222
@c man begin SEEALSO
223
gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
224
@c man end
225
@end ignore
226
 
227
@c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
228
@c to be limited to one line for the header.
229
@smallexample
230
@c man begin SYNOPSIS
231
@value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
232
 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
233
 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
234
 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-2}] [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
235
 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
236
 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237
 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}] [@b{-o}
238
 @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}] [@b{--statistics}]
239
 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}] [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}]
240
 [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}] [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
241
 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
242
 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
243
@c
244
@c Target dependent options are listed below.  Keep the list sorted.
245
@c Add an empty line for separation.
246
@ifset ALPHA
247
 
248
@emph{Target Alpha options:}
249
   [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
250
   [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
251
   [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
252
   [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
253
   [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
254
@end ifset
255
@ifset ARC
256
 
257
@emph{Target ARC options:}
258
   [@b{-marc[5|6|7|8]}]
259
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
260
@end ifset
261
@ifset ARM
262
 
263
@emph{Target ARM options:}
264
@c Don't document the deprecated options
265
   [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
266
   [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
267
   [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
268
   [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
269
   [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
270
   [@b{-mthumb}]
271
   [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
272
   [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
273
    @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
274
   [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
275
@end ifset
276
@ifset CRIS
277
 
278
@emph{Target CRIS options:}
279
   [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
280
   [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
281
   [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
282
   [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
283
@c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
284
@c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
285
@end ifset
286
@ifset D10V
287
 
288
@emph{Target D10V options:}
289
   [@b{-O}]
290
@end ifset
291
@ifset D30V
292
 
293
@emph{Target D30V options:}
294
   [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
295
@end ifset
296
@ifset H8
297
 
298
@emph{Target H8/300 options:}
299
   [-h-tick-hex]
300
@end ifset
301
@ifset HPPA
302
@c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
303
@end ifset
304
@ifset I80386
305
 
306
@emph{Target i386 options:}
307
   [@b{--32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
308
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
309
@end ifset
310
@ifset I960
311
 
312
@emph{Target i960 options:}
313
@c see md_parse_option in tc-i960.c
314
   [@b{-ACA}|@b{-ACA_A}|@b{-ACB}|@b{-ACC}|@b{-AKA}|@b{-AKB}|
315
    @b{-AKC}|@b{-AMC}]
316
   [@b{-b}] [@b{-no-relax}]
317
@end ifset
318
@ifset IA64
319
 
320
@emph{Target IA-64 options:}
321
   [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
322
   [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
323
   [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
324
   [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
325
   [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
326
   [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
327
   [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
328
@end ifset
329
@ifset IP2K
330
 
331
@emph{Target IP2K options:}
332
   [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
333
@end ifset
334
@ifset M32C
335
 
336
@emph{Target M32C options:}
337
   [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
338
@end ifset
339
@ifset M32R
340
 
341
@emph{Target M32R options:}
342
   [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
343
   @b{--W[n]p}]
344
@end ifset
345
@ifset M680X0
346
 
347
@emph{Target M680X0 options:}
348
   [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
349
@end ifset
350
@ifset M68HC11
351
 
352
@emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
353
   [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}]
354
   [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
355
   [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
356
   [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
357
   [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
358
   [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
359
@end ifset
360
@ifset MCORE
361
 
362
@emph{Target MCORE options:}
363
   [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
364
   [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
365
@end ifset
366
@ifset MICROBLAZE
367
@emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
368
@c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
369
@end ifset
370
@ifset MIPS
371
 
372
@emph{Target MIPS options:}
373
   [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
374
   [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
375
   [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
376
   [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
377
   [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
378
   [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
379
   [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
380
   [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
381
   [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
382
   [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
383
   [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
384
   [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
385
   [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
386
   [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
387
   [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
388
   [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
389
   [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
390
   [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
391
   [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
392
@end ifset
393
@ifset MMIX
394
 
395
@emph{Target MMIX options:}
396
   [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
397
   [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
398
   [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
399
   [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
400
@end ifset
401
@ifset PDP11
402
 
403
@emph{Target PDP11 options:}
404
   [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
405
   [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
406
   [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
407
@end ifset
408
@ifset PJ
409
 
410
@emph{Target picoJava options:}
411
   [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
412
@end ifset
413
@ifset PPC
414
 
415
@emph{Target PowerPC options:}
416
   [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|
417
    @b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}]
418
   [@b{-mcom}|@b{-many}|@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}] [@b{-memb}]
419
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
420
   [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}]
421
   [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
422
   [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
423
@end ifset
424
@ifset S390
425
 
426
@emph{Target s390 options:}
427
   [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
428
   [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
429
   [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
430
@end ifset
431
@ifset SCORE
432
 
433
@emph{Target SCORE options:}
434
   [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
435
   [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
436
   [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
437
   [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
438
@end ifset
439
@ifset SPARC
440
 
441
@emph{Target SPARC options:}
442
@c The order here is important.  See c-sparc.texi.
443
   [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
444
    @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}]
445
   [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}] [@b{-bump}]
446
   [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
447
@end ifset
448
@ifset TIC54X
449
 
450
@emph{Target TIC54X options:}
451
 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
452
 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
453
@end ifset
454
 
455
@ifset Z80
456
 
457
@emph{Target Z80 options:}
458
  [@b{-z80}] [@b{-r800}]
459
  [@b{ -ignore-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wnud}]
460
  [@b{ -ignore-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wnup}]
461
  [@b{ -warn-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Wud}]
462
  [@b{ -warn-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Wup}]
463
  [@b{ -forbid-undocumented-instructions}] [@b{-Fud}]
464
  [@b{ -forbid-unportable-instructions}] [@b{-Fup}]
465
@end ifset
466
 
467
@ifset Z8000
468
@c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
469
@end ifset
470
@ifset XTENSA
471
 
472
@emph{Target Xtensa options:}
473
 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
474
 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
475
 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
476
 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
477
@end ifset
478
@c man end
479
@end smallexample
480
 
481
@c man begin OPTIONS
482
 
483
@table @gcctabopt
484
@include at-file.texi
485
 
486
@item -a[cdghlmns]
487
Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
488
 
489
@table @gcctabopt
490
@item -ac
491
omit false conditionals
492
 
493
@item -ad
494
omit debugging directives
495
 
496
@item -ag
497
include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
498
 
499
@item -ah
500
include high-level source
501
 
502
@item -al
503
include assembly
504
 
505
@item -am
506
include macro expansions
507
 
508
@item -an
509
omit forms processing
510
 
511
@item -as
512
include symbols
513
 
514
@item =file
515
set the name of the listing file
516
@end table
517
 
518
You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
519
listing without forms processing.  The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
520
the last one.  By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
521
 
522
@item --alternate
523
Begin in alternate macro mode.
524
@ifclear man
525
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
526
@end ifclear
527
 
528
@item -D
529
Ignored.  This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
530
other assemblers.
531
 
532
@item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
533
When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
534
information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
535
 
536
@item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
537
Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
538
@var{value} must be an integer constant.  As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
539
indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
540
value.  The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
541
use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
542
 
543
@item -f
544
``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
545
compiler output).
546
 
547
@item -g
548
@itemx --gen-debug
549
Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
550
debug format is preferred by the target.  This currently means either STABS,
551
ECOFF or DWARF2.
552
 
553
@item --gstabs
554
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line.  This
555
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
556
 
557
@item --gstabs+
558
Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
559
extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
560
debuggers crash or refuse to read your program.  This
561
may help debugging assembler code.  Currently the only GNU extension is
562
the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
563
 
564
@item --gdwarf-2
565
Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line.  This
566
may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.  Note---this
567
option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
568
 
569
@item --help
570
Print a summary of the command line options and exit.
571
 
572
@item --target-help
573
Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
574
 
575
@item -I @var{dir}
576
Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
577
 
578
@item -J
579
Don't warn about signed overflow.
580
 
581
@item -K
582
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
583
This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
584
@end ifclear
585
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
586
Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
587
@end ifset
588
 
589
@item -L
590
@itemx --keep-locals
591
Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols.  These symbols start with
592
system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
593
or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
594
@ifclear man
595
@xref{Symbol Names}.
596
@end ifclear
597
 
598
@item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
599
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
600
listing to @var{number}.
601
 
602
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
603
Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
604
lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
605
 
606
@item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
607
Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
608
@var{number} bytes.
609
 
610
@item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
611
Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
612
to @var{number} + 1.
613
 
614
@item -o @var{objfile}
615
Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
616
 
617
@item -R
618
Fold the data section into the text section.
619
 
620
@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
621
Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
622
@var{number}.  Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
623
assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
624
memory requirements.  Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
625
requirements at the expense of speed.
626
 
627
@item --reduce-memory-overheads
628
This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
629
assembly processes slower.  Currently this switch is a synonym for
630
@samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
631
 
632
@item --statistics
633
Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
634
assembly.
635
 
636
@item --strip-local-absolute
637
Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
638
 
639
@item -v
640
@itemx -version
641
Print the @command{as} version.
642
 
643
@item --version
644
Print the @command{as} version and exit.
645
 
646
@item -W
647
@itemx --no-warn
648
Suppress warning messages.
649
 
650
@item --fatal-warnings
651
Treat warnings as errors.
652
 
653
@item --warn
654
Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
655
 
656
@item -w
657
Ignored.
658
 
659
@item -x
660
Ignored.
661
 
662
@item -Z
663
Generate an object file even after errors.
664
 
665
@item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
666
Standard input, or source files to assemble.
667
 
668
@end table
669
 
670
@ifset ARC
671
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
672
an ARC processor.
673
 
674
@table @gcctabopt
675
@item -marc[5|6|7|8]
676
This option selects the core processor variant.
677
@item -EB | -EL
678
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
679
@end table
680
@end ifset
681
 
682
@ifset ARM
683
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
684
processor family.
685
 
686
@table @gcctabopt
687
@item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
688
Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
689
@item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
690
Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
691
@item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
692
Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
693
@item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
694
Select which floating point ABI is in use.
695
@item -mthumb
696
Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
697
@item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
698
Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
699
@item -EB | -EL
700
Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
701
@item -mthumb-interwork
702
Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
703
ARM code in mind.
704
@item -k
705
Specify that PIC code has been generated.
706
@end table
707
@end ifset
708
 
709
@ifset CRIS
710
See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
711
@end ifset
712
 
713
@ifset D10V
714
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
715
a D10V processor.
716
@table @gcctabopt
717
@cindex D10V optimization
718
@cindex optimization, D10V
719
@item -O
720
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
721
@end table
722
@end ifset
723
 
724
@ifset D30V
725
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
726
processor.
727
@table @gcctabopt
728
@cindex D30V optimization
729
@cindex optimization, D30V
730
@item -O
731
Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
732
 
733
@cindex D30V nops
734
@item -n
735
Warn when nops are generated.
736
 
737
@cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
738
@item -N
739
Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
740
@end table
741
@end ifset
742
 
743
@ifset I960
744
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
745
Intel 80960 processor.
746
 
747
@table @gcctabopt
748
@item -ACA | -ACA_A | -ACB | -ACC | -AKA | -AKB | -AKC | -AMC
749
Specify which variant of the 960 architecture is the target.
750
 
751
@item -b
752
Add code to collect statistics about branches taken.
753
 
754
@item -no-relax
755
Do not alter compare-and-branch instructions for long displacements;
756
error if necessary.
757
 
758
@end table
759
@end ifset
760
 
761
@ifset IP2K
762
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
763
Ubicom IP2K series.
764
 
765
@table @gcctabopt
766
 
767
@item -mip2022ext
768
Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
769
 
770
@item -mip2022
771
Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
772
just the basic IP2022 ones.
773
 
774
@end table
775
@end ifset
776
 
777
@ifset M32C
778
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
779
Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
780
 
781
@table @gcctabopt
782
 
783
@item -m32c
784
Assemble M32C instructions.
785
 
786
@item -m16c
787
Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
788
 
789
@item -relax
790
Enable support for link-time relaxations.
791
 
792
@item -h-tick-hex
793
Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
794
 
795
@end table
796
@end ifset
797
 
798
@ifset M32R
799
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
800
Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
801
 
802
@table @gcctabopt
803
 
804
@item --m32rx
805
Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target.  The default
806
is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
807
 
808
@item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
809
Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
810
encountered.
811
 
812
@item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
813
Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
814
encountered.
815
 
816
@end table
817
@end ifset
818
 
819
@ifset M680X0
820
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
821
Motorola 68000 series.
822
 
823
@table @gcctabopt
824
 
825
@item -l
826
Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
827
 
828
@item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
829
@itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
830
@itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
831
Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target.  The default
832
is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
833
 
834
@item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
835
The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
836
The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32.  Although
837
the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
838
two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
839
coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
840
 
841
@item -m68851 | -mno-68851
842
The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
843
unit coprocessor.  The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
844
 
845
@end table
846
@end ifset
847
 
848
@ifset PDP11
849
 
850
For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
851
see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
852
 
853
@table @gcctabopt
854
@item -mpic | -mno-pic
855
Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code.  The
856
default is @option{-mpic}.
857
 
858
@item -mall
859
@itemx -mall-extensions
860
Enable all instruction set extensions.  This is the default.
861
 
862
@item -mno-extensions
863
Disable all instruction set extensions.
864
 
865
@item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
866
Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
867
 
868
@item -m@var{cpu}
869
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
870
disable all other extensions.
871
 
872
@item -m@var{machine}
873
Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
874
model, and disable all other extensions.
875
@end table
876
 
877
@end ifset
878
 
879
@ifset PJ
880
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
881
a picoJava processor.
882
 
883
@table @gcctabopt
884
 
885
@cindex PJ endianness
886
@cindex endianness, PJ
887
@cindex big endian output, PJ
888
@item -mb
889
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
890
 
891
@cindex little endian output, PJ
892
@item -ml
893
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
894
 
895
@end table
896
@end ifset
897
 
898
@ifset M68HC11
899
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
900
Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
901
 
902
@table @gcctabopt
903
 
904
@item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12
905
Specify what processor is the target.  The default is
906
defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
907
 
908
@item -mshort
909
Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
910
 
911
@item -mlong
912
Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
913
 
914
@item -mshort-double
915
Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
916
 
917
@item -mlong-double
918
Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
919
 
920
@item --force-long-branches
921
Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
922
conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
923
sub routine.
924
 
925
@item -S | --short-branches
926
Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
927
when the offset is out of range.
928
 
929
@item --strict-direct-mode
930
Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
931
when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
932
 
933
@item --print-insn-syntax
934
Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
935
 
936
@item --print-opcodes
937
print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
938
 
939
@item --generate-example
940
print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
941
This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
942
 
943
@end table
944
@end ifset
945
 
946
@ifset SPARC
947
The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
948
for the SPARC architecture:
949
 
950
@table @gcctabopt
951
@item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
952
@itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
953
Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
954
 
955
@samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
956
@samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
957
 
958
@samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
959
UltraSPARC extensions.
960
 
961
@item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
962
For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler.  These options are
963
equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
964
 
965
@item -bump
966
Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
967
@end table
968
@end ifset
969
 
970
@ifset TIC54X
971
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
972
architecture.
973
 
974
@table @gcctabopt
975
@item -mfar-mode
976
Enable extended addressing mode.  All addresses and relocations will assume
977
extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
978
@item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
979
Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
980
@item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
981
Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
982
behaviour in the shell.
983
@end table
984
@end ifset
985
 
986
@ifset MIPS
987
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
988
a @sc{mips} processor.
989
 
990
@table @gcctabopt
991
@item -G @var{num}
992
This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
993
implicitly with the @code{gp} register.  It is only accepted for targets that
994
use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix.  The default value is 8.
995
 
996
@cindex MIPS endianness
997
@cindex endianness, MIPS
998
@cindex big endian output, MIPS
999
@item -EB
1000
Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1001
 
1002
@cindex little endian output, MIPS
1003
@item -EL
1004
Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1005
 
1006
@cindex MIPS ISA
1007
@item -mips1
1008
@itemx -mips2
1009
@itemx -mips3
1010
@itemx -mips4
1011
@itemx -mips5
1012
@itemx -mips32
1013
@itemx -mips32r2
1014
@itemx -mips64
1015
@itemx -mips64r2
1016
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} Instruction Set Architecture level.
1017
@samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1018
alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1019
@samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1020
@samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips64}, and
1021
@samp{-mips64r2}
1022
correspond to generic
1023
@samp{MIPS V}, @samp{MIPS32}, @samp{MIPS32 Release 2}, @samp{MIPS64},
1024
and @samp{MIPS64 Release 2}
1025
ISA processors, respectively.
1026
 
1027
@item -march=@var{CPU}
1028
Generate code for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1029
 
1030
@item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1031
Schedule and tune for a particular @sc{mips} cpu.
1032
 
1033
@item -mfix7000
1034
@itemx -mno-fix7000
1035
Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1036
of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1037
 
1038
@item -mdebug
1039
@itemx -no-mdebug
1040
Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1041
section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1042
 
1043
@item -mpdr
1044
@itemx -mno-pdr
1045
Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1046
 
1047
@item -mgp32
1048
@itemx -mfp32
1049
The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1050
flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1051
all times.  @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1052
and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1053
 
1054
@item -mips16
1055
@itemx -no-mips16
1056
Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor.  This is equivalent to putting
1057
@code{.set mips16} at the start of the assembly file.  @samp{-no-mips16}
1058
turns off this option.
1059
 
1060
@item -msmartmips
1061
@itemx -mno-smartmips
1062
Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1063
equivalent to putting @code{.set smartmips} at the start of the assembly file.
1064
@samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1065
 
1066
@item -mips3d
1067
@itemx -no-mips3d
1068
Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1069
This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1070
@samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1071
 
1072
@item -mdmx
1073
@itemx -no-mdmx
1074
Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1075
This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1076
@samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1077
 
1078
@item -mdsp
1079
@itemx -mno-dsp
1080
Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1081
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1082
@samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1083
 
1084
@item -mdspr2
1085
@itemx -mno-dspr2
1086
Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1087
This option implies -mdsp.
1088
This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1089
@samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1090
 
1091
@item -mmt
1092
@itemx -mno-mt
1093
Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1094
This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1095
@samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1096
 
1097
@item --construct-floats
1098
@itemx --no-construct-floats
1099
The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1100
double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1101
value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1102
the double width register.  By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1103
selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1104
 
1105
@cindex emulation
1106
@item --emulation=@var{name}
1107
This option causes @command{@value{AS}} to emulate @command{@value{AS}} configured
1108
for some other target, in all respects, including output format (choosing
1109
between ELF and ECOFF only), handling of pseudo-opcodes which may generate
1110
debugging information or store symbol table information, and default
1111
endianness.  The available configuration names are: @samp{mipsecoff},
1112
@samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslecoff}, @samp{mipsbecoff}, @samp{mipslelf},
1113
@samp{mipsbelf}.  The first two do not alter the default endianness from that
1114
of the primary target for which the assembler was configured; the others change
1115
the default to little- or big-endian as indicated by the @samp{b} or @samp{l}
1116
in the name.  Using @samp{-EB} or @samp{-EL} will override the endianness
1117
selection in any case.
1118
 
1119
This option is currently supported only when the primary target
1120
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for is a @sc{mips} ELF or ECOFF target.
1121
Furthermore, the primary target or others specified with
1122
@samp{--enable-targets=@dots{}} at configuration time must include support for
1123
the other format, if both are to be available.  For example, the Irix 5
1124
configuration includes support for both.
1125
 
1126
Eventually, this option will support more configurations, with more
1127
fine-grained control over the assembler's behavior, and will be supported for
1128
more processors.
1129
 
1130
@item -nocpp
1131
@command{@value{AS}} ignores this option.  It is accepted for compatibility with
1132
the native tools.
1133
 
1134
@item --trap
1135
@itemx --no-trap
1136
@itemx --break
1137
@itemx --no-break
1138
Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1139
@samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1140
(and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1141
@samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1142
break exception.
1143
 
1144
@item -n
1145
When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1146
time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1147
@end table
1148
@end ifset
1149
 
1150
@ifset MCORE
1151
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1152
an MCore processor.
1153
 
1154
@table @gcctabopt
1155
@item -jsri2bsr
1156
@itemx -nojsri2bsr
1157
Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation.  By default this is enabled.
1158
The command line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1159
 
1160
@item -sifilter
1161
@itemx -nosifilter
1162
Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour.  By default this is disabled.
1163
The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command line option.
1164
 
1165
@item -relax
1166
Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1167
 
1168
@item -mcpu=[210|340]
1169
Select the cpu type on the target hardware.  This controls which instructions
1170
can be assembled.
1171
 
1172
@item -EB
1173
Assemble for a big endian target.
1174
 
1175
@item -EL
1176
Assemble for a little endian target.
1177
 
1178
@end table
1179
@end ifset
1180
 
1181
@ifset MMIX
1182
See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1183
@end ifset
1184
 
1185
@ifset S390
1186
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1187
processor family.
1188
 
1189
@table @gcctabopt
1190
@item -m31
1191
@itemx -m64
1192
Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1193
@item -mesa
1194
@item -mzarch
1195
Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1196
Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1197
@item -march=@var{processor}
1198
Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g6}, @samp{g6},
1199
@samp{z900}, @samp{z990}, @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec}, or @samp{z10}.
1200
@item -mregnames
1201
@itemx -mno-regnames
1202
Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1203
@item -mwarn-areg-zero
1204
Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1205
but evaluates to zero.
1206
@end table
1207
@end ifset
1208
 
1209
@ifset XTENSA
1210
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1211
an Xtensa processor.
1212
 
1213
@table @gcctabopt
1214
@item --text-section-literals | --no-text-section-literals
1215
With @option{--text-@-section-@-literals}, literal pools are interspersed
1216
in the text section.  The default is
1217
@option{--no-@-text-@-section-@-literals}, which places literals in a
1218
separate section in the output file.  These options only affect literals
1219
referenced via PC-relative @code{L32R} instructions; literals for
1220
absolute mode @code{L32R} instructions are handled separately.
1221
 
1222
@item --absolute-literals | --no-absolute-literals
1223
Indicate to the assembler whether @code{L32R} instructions use absolute
1224
or PC-relative addressing.  The default is to assume absolute addressing
1225
if the Xtensa processor includes the absolute @code{L32R} addressing
1226
option.  Otherwise, only the PC-relative @code{L32R} mode can be used.
1227
 
1228
@item --target-align | --no-target-align
1229
Enable or disable automatic alignment to reduce branch penalties at the
1230
expense of some code density.  The default is @option{--target-@-align}.
1231
 
1232
@item --longcalls | --no-longcalls
1233
Enable or disable transformation of call instructions to allow calls
1234
across a greater range of addresses.  The default is
1235
@option{--no-@-longcalls}.
1236
 
1237
@item --transform | --no-transform
1238
Enable or disable all assembler transformations of Xtensa instructions.
1239
The default is @option{--transform};
1240
@option{--no-transform} should be used only in the rare cases when the
1241
instructions must be exactly as specified in the assembly source.
1242
 
1243
@item --rename-section @var{oldname}=@var{newname}
1244
When generating output sections, rename the @var{oldname} section to
1245
@var{newname}.
1246
@end table
1247
@end ifset
1248
 
1249
@ifset Z80
1250
The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1251
a Z80 family processor.
1252
@table @gcctabopt
1253
@item -z80
1254
Assemble for Z80 processor.
1255
@item -r800
1256
Assemble for R800 processor.
1257
@item  -ignore-undocumented-instructions
1258
@itemx -Wnud
1259
Assemble undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800 without warning.
1260
@item  -ignore-unportable-instructions
1261
@itemx -Wnup
1262
Assemble all undocumented Z80 instructions without warning.
1263
@item  -warn-undocumented-instructions
1264
@itemx -Wud
1265
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that also work on R800.
1266
@item  -warn-unportable-instructions
1267
@itemx -Wup
1268
Issue a warning for undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800.
1269
@item  -forbid-undocumented-instructions
1270
@itemx -Fud
1271
Treat all undocumented instructions as errors.
1272
@item  -forbid-unportable-instructions
1273
@itemx -Fup
1274
Treat undocumented Z80 instructions that do not work on R800 as errors.
1275
@end table
1276
@end ifset
1277
 
1278
@c man end
1279
 
1280
@menu
1281
* Manual::                      Structure of this Manual
1282
* GNU Assembler::               The GNU Assembler
1283
* Object Formats::              Object File Formats
1284
* Command Line::                Command Line
1285
* Input Files::                 Input Files
1286
* Object::                      Output (Object) File
1287
* Errors::                      Error and Warning Messages
1288
@end menu
1289
 
1290
@node Manual
1291
@section Structure of this Manual
1292
 
1293
@cindex manual, structure and purpose
1294
This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1295
@sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}.  We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1296
notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1297
@command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1298
 
1299
@ifclear GENERIC
1300
We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
1301
configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
1302
@end ifclear
1303
@ifset GENERIC
1304
This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
1305
various flavors of the assembler.
1306
@end ifset
1307
 
1308
@cindex machine instructions (not covered)
1309
On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
1310
to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
1311
In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
1312
architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
1313
mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
1314
particular architecture.
1315
@ifset GENERIC
1316
You may want to consult the manufacturer's
1317
machine architecture manual for this information.
1318
@end ifset
1319
@ifclear GENERIC
1320
@ifset H8/300
1321
For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
1322
Series Programming Manual}.  For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
1323
Programming Manual} (Renesas).
1324
@end ifset
1325
@ifset SH
1326
For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
1327
see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
1328
@cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
1329
@cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
1330
@end ifset
1331
@ifset Z8000
1332
For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
1333
@end ifset
1334
@end ifclear
1335
 
1336
@c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
1337
@ignore
1338
Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
1339
the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
1340
Foundation, Inc.}.  This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
1341
computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
1342
once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
1343
qualification.
1344
 
1345
@command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
1346
human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
1347
computer-readable series of instructions.  Different versions of
1348
@command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
1349
@end ignore
1350
 
1351
@c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
1352
@c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long".  Defining "word" to any
1353
@c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
1354
@c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
1355
@c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
1356
@c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
1357
@c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
1358
@c directives).
1359
 
1360
@node GNU Assembler
1361
@section The GNU Assembler
1362
 
1363
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1364
 
1365
@sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
1366
@ifclear GENERIC
1367
This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
1368
configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
1369
@end ifclear
1370
If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
1371
should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
1372
architecture.  Each version has much in common with the others,
1373
including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
1374
@dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
1375
 
1376
@cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
1377
@command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
1378
@sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
1379
@code{@value{LD}}.  Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
1380
assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
1381
machine would assemble.
1382
@ifset VAX
1383
Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
1384
@end ifset
1385
@ifset M680X0
1386
@c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
1387
@c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
1388
This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
1389
assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
1390
incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
1391
@end ifset
1392
 
1393
@c man end
1394
 
1395
Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
1396
program in one pass of the source file.  This has a subtle impact on the
1397
@kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
1398
 
1399
@node Object Formats
1400
@section Object File Formats
1401
 
1402
@cindex object file format
1403
The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
1404
object file formats.  For the most part, this does not affect how you
1405
write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
1406
are typically different in different file formats.  @xref{Symbol
1407
Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
1408
@ifclear GENERIC
1409
@ifclear MULTI-OBJ
1410
For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
1411
@value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
1412
@end ifclear
1413
@c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
1414
@ifset I960
1415
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1416
@code{b.out} or COFF format object files.
1417
@end ifset
1418
@ifset HPPA
1419
On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
1420
SOM or ELF format object files.
1421
@end ifset
1422
@end ifclear
1423
 
1424
@node Command Line
1425
@section Command Line
1426
 
1427
@cindex command line conventions
1428
 
1429
After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
1430
options and file names.  Options may appear in any order, and may be
1431
before, after, or between file names.  The order of file names is
1432
significant.
1433
 
1434
@cindex standard input, as input file
1435
@kindex --
1436
@file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
1437
explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
1438
 
1439
@cindex options, command line
1440
Except for @samp{--} any command line argument that begins with a
1441
hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option.  Each option changes the behavior of
1442
@command{@value{AS}}.  No option changes the way another option works.  An
1443
option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
1444
the letter is important.   All options are optional.
1445
 
1446
Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them.  The file
1447
name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
1448
with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
1449
standard).  These two command lines are equivalent:
1450
 
1451
@smallexample
1452
@value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
1453
@value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
1454
@end smallexample
1455
 
1456
@node Input Files
1457
@section Input Files
1458
 
1459
@cindex input
1460
@cindex source program
1461
@cindex files, input
1462
We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
1463
describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}.  The program may
1464
be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
1465
doesn't change the meaning of the source.
1466
 
1467
@c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
1468
@c APL training...   doc@cygnus.com
1469
The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
1470
order specified.
1471
 
1472
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1473
Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
1474
program.  The source program is made up of one or more files.
1475
(The standard input is also a file.)
1476
 
1477
You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
1478
names.  The input files are read (from left file name to right).  A
1479
command line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
1480
is taken to be an input file name.
1481
 
1482
If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
1483
from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal.  You
1484
may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
1485
to assemble.
1486
 
1487
Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
1488
in your command line.
1489
 
1490
If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
1491
file.
1492
 
1493
@c man end
1494
 
1495
@subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
1496
 
1497
@cindex input file linenumbers
1498
@cindex line numbers, in input files
1499
There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
1500
either may be used in reporting error messages.  One way refers to a line
1501
number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
1502
``logical'' file.  @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
1503
 
1504
@dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
1505
to @command{@value{AS}}.
1506
 
1507
@dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
1508
directives; they bear no relation to physical files.  Logical file names help
1509
error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
1510
is itself synthesized from other files.  @command{@value{AS}} understands the
1511
@samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor.  See also
1512
@ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
1513
 
1514
@node Object
1515
@section Output (Object) File
1516
 
1517
@cindex object file
1518
@cindex output file
1519
@kindex a.out
1520
@kindex .o
1521
Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
1522
your assembly language program translated into numbers.  This file
1523
is the object file.  Its default name is
1524
@ifclear BOUT
1525
@code{a.out}.
1526
@end ifclear
1527
@ifset BOUT
1528
@ifset GENERIC
1529
@code{a.out}, or
1530
@end ifset
1531
@code{b.out} when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for the Intel 80960.
1532
@end ifset
1533
You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option.  Conventionally,
1534
object file names end with @file{.o}.  The default name is used for historical
1535
reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
1536
directly into a runnable program.  (For some formats, this isn't currently
1537
possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
1538
 
1539
@cindex linker
1540
@kindex ld
1541
The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}.  It contains
1542
assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
1543
the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
1544
information for the debugger.
1545
 
1546
@c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
1547
@c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
1548
 
1549
@node Errors
1550
@section Error and Warning Messages
1551
 
1552
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1553
 
1554
@cindex error messages
1555
@cindex warning messages
1556
@cindex messages from assembler
1557
@command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
1558
file (usually your terminal).  This should not happen when  a compiler
1559
runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically.  Warnings report an assumption made so
1560
that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
1561
grave problem that stops the assembly.
1562
 
1563
@c man end
1564
 
1565
@cindex format of warning messages
1566
Warning messages have the format
1567
 
1568
@smallexample
1569
file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
1570
@end smallexample
1571
 
1572
@noindent
1573
@cindex line numbers, in warnings/errors
1574
(where @b{NNN} is a line number).  If a logical file name has been given
1575
(@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) it is used for the filename, otherwise the name of
1576
the current input file is used.  If a logical line number was given
1577
@ifset GENERIC
1578
(@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
1579
@end ifset
1580
then it is used to calculate the number printed,
1581
otherwise the actual line in the current source file is printed.  The
1582
message text is intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix
1583
tradition).
1584
 
1585
@cindex format of error messages
1586
Error messages have the format
1587
@smallexample
1588
file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
1589
@end smallexample
1590
The file name and line number are derived as for warning
1591
messages.  The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
1592
because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
1593
 
1594
@node Invoking
1595
@chapter Command-Line Options
1596
 
1597
@cindex options, all versions of assembler
1598
This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
1599
versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
1600
for options specific
1601
@ifclear GENERIC
1602
to the @value{TARGET} target.
1603
@end ifclear
1604
@ifset GENERIC
1605
to particular machine architectures.
1606
@end ifset
1607
 
1608
@c man begin DESCRIPTION
1609
 
1610
If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
1611
you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
1612
The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
1613
by commas.  For example:
1614
 
1615
@smallexample
1616
gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
1617
@end smallexample
1618
 
1619
@noindent
1620
This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
1621
standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
1622
local symbols in the symbol table).
1623
 
1624
Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
1625
command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
1626
(You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
1627
precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
1628
assembler.)
1629
 
1630
@c man end
1631
 
1632
@menu
1633
* a::             -a[cdghlns] enable listings
1634
* alternate::     --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
1635
* D::             -D for compatibility
1636
* f::             -f to work faster
1637
* I::             -I for .include search path
1638
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1639
* K::             -K for compatibility
1640
@end ifclear
1641
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1642
* K::             -K for difference tables
1643
@end ifset
1644
 
1645
* L::             -L to retain local symbols
1646
* listing::       --listing-XXX to configure listing output
1647
* M::             -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
1648
* MD::            --MD for dependency tracking
1649
* o::             -o to name the object file
1650
* R::             -R to join data and text sections
1651
* statistics::    --statistics to see statistics about assembly
1652
* traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
1653
* v::             -v to announce version
1654
* W::             -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
1655
* Z::             -Z to make object file even after errors
1656
@end menu
1657
 
1658
@node a
1659
@section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
1660
 
1661
@kindex -a
1662
@kindex -ac
1663
@kindex -ad
1664
@kindex -ag
1665
@kindex -ah
1666
@kindex -al
1667
@kindex -an
1668
@kindex -as
1669
@cindex listings, enabling
1670
@cindex assembly listings, enabling
1671
 
1672
These options enable listing output from the assembler.  By itself,
1673
@samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
1674
You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
1675
@samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
1676
@samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
1677
@samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
1678
High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
1679
@samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
1680
also.
1681
 
1682
Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
1683
information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
1684
 
1685
Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing.  Any lines
1686
which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
1687
other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
1688
omitted from the listing.
1689
 
1690
Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
1691
listing.
1692
 
1693
Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
1694
listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
1695
@code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
1696
@code{.sbttl}.
1697
The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
1698
If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
1699
listing-control directives have no effect.
1700
 
1701
The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
1702
@emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
1703
 
1704
Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
1705
because it
1706
is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command line switch
1707
is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
1708
directives.  This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
1709
stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler.  This reduces
1710
memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
1711
 
1712
@node alternate
1713
@section @option{--alternate}
1714
 
1715
@kindex --alternate
1716
Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
1717
 
1718
@node D
1719
@section @option{-D}
1720
 
1721
@kindex -D
1722
This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
1723
likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
1724
@command{@value{AS}}.
1725
 
1726
@node f
1727
@section Work Faster: @option{-f}
1728
 
1729
@kindex -f
1730
@cindex trusted compiler
1731
@cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
1732
@samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
1733
(trusted) compiler.  @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
1734
and comment preprocessing on
1735
the input file(s) before assembling them.  @xref{Preprocessing,
1736
,Preprocessing}.
1737
 
1738
@quotation
1739
@emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
1740
preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
1741
not work correctly.
1742
@end quotation
1743
 
1744
@node I
1745
@section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
1746
 
1747
@kindex -I @var{path}
1748
@cindex paths for @code{.include}
1749
@cindex search path for @code{.include}
1750
@cindex @code{include} directive search path
1751
Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
1752
@command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
1753
directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You may use @option{-I} as
1754
many times as necessary to include a variety of paths.  The current
1755
working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
1756
searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
1757
specified (left to right) on the command line.
1758
 
1759
@node K
1760
@section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
1761
 
1762
@kindex -K
1763
@ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1764
On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect.  It is
1765
permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
1766
where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
1767
generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables.  The @value{TARGET}
1768
family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
1769
alteration on other platforms.
1770
@end ifclear
1771
 
1772
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
1773
@cindex difference tables, warning
1774
@cindex warning for altered difference tables
1775
@command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
1776
form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
1777
You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
1778
is done.
1779
@end ifset
1780
 
1781
@node L
1782
@section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
1783
 
1784
@kindex -L
1785
@cindex local symbols, retaining in output
1786
Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
1787
@samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
1788
called @dfn{local symbols}.  @xref{Symbol Names}.  Normally you do not see
1789
such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
1790
programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
1791
notice.  Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
1792
such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
1793
 
1794
This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
1795
in the object file.  Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
1796
@code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
1797
 
1798
@node listing
1799
@section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
1800
 
1801
The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command line switch
1802
@samp{-a} (@pxref{a}).  This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
1803
hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
1804
them as a listing file.  The format of this listing can be controlled by
1805
directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
1806
@code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
1807
@code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
1808
@code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
1809
 
1810
@table @gcctabopt
1811
@item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
1812
@kindex --listing-lhs-width
1813
@cindex Width of first line disassembly output
1814
Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump.  This
1815
dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
1816
 
1817
@item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
1818
@kindex --listing-lhs-width2
1819
@cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
1820
Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
1821
a given input source line.  If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
1822
the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}.  If neither
1823
switch is used the default is to one.
1824
 
1825
@item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
1826
@kindex --listing-rhs-width
1827
@cindex Width of source line output
1828
Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
1829
alongside the hex dump.  The default value for this parameter is 100.  The
1830
source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
1831
 
1832
@item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
1833
@kindex --listing-cont-lines
1834
@cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
1835
Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
1836
displayed for a given single line of source input.  The default value is 4.
1837
@end table
1838
 
1839
@node M
1840
@section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
1841
 
1842
@kindex -M
1843
@cindex MRI compatibility mode
1844
The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode.  This
1845
changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
1846
compatible with the @code{ASM68K} or the @code{ASM960} (depending upon the
1847
configured target) assembler from Microtec Research.  The exact nature of the
1848
MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
1849
information.  Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
1850
arguments is somewhat different.  The purpose of this option is to permit
1851
assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
1852
 
1853
The MRI compatibility is not complete.  Certain operations of the MRI assembler
1854
depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
1855
file formats.  Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
1856
individually.  These are:
1857
 
1858
@itemize @bullet
1859
@item global symbols in common section
1860
 
1861
The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
1862
Other object file formats do not support this.  @command{@value{AS}} handles
1863
common sections by treating them as a single common symbol.  It permits local
1864
symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
1865
symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
1866
 
1867
@item complex relocations
1868
 
1869
The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
1870
relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections.  These
1871
are not support by other object file formats.
1872
 
1873
@item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
1874
 
1875
The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
1876
This is not supported by other object file formats.  The start address may
1877
instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
1878
script.
1879
 
1880
@item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
1881
 
1882
The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
1883
name to the output file.  This is not supported by other object file formats.
1884
 
1885
@item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
1886
 
1887
The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
1888
address.  This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
1889
which changes the location within the current section.  Absolute sections are
1890
not supported by other object file formats.  The address of a section may be
1891
assigned within a linker script.
1892
@end itemize
1893
 
1894
There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
1895
@command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
1896
seem of little consequence.  Some of these may be supported in future releases.
1897
 
1898
@itemize @bullet
1899
 
1900
@item EBCDIC strings
1901
 
1902
EBCDIC strings are not supported.
1903
 
1904
@item packed binary coded decimal
1905
 
1906
Packed binary coded decimal is not supported.  This means that the @code{DC.P}
1907
and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
1908
 
1909
@item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
1910
 
1911
The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
1912
 
1913
@item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
1914
 
1915
The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
1916
 
1917
@item @code{OPT} branch control options
1918
 
1919
The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
1920
@code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} automatically
1921
relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
1922
these options serve no purpose.
1923
 
1924
@item @code{OPT} list control options
1925
 
1926
The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
1927
@code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
1928
@code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
1929
 
1930
@item other @code{OPT} options
1931
 
1932
The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
1933
@code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
1934
 
1935
@item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
1936
 
1937
The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
1938
@code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
1939
 
1940
@item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
1941
 
1942
The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
1943
 
1944
@item @code{.debug} pseudo-op
1945
 
1946
The i960 @code{.debug} pseudo-op is not supported.
1947
 
1948
@item @code{.extended} pseudo-op
1949
 
1950
The i960 @code{.extended} pseudo-op is not supported.
1951
 
1952
@item @code{.list} pseudo-op.
1953
 
1954
The various options of the i960 @code{.list} pseudo-op are not supported.
1955
 
1956
@item @code{.optimize} pseudo-op
1957
 
1958
The i960 @code{.optimize} pseudo-op is not supported.
1959
 
1960
@item @code{.output} pseudo-op
1961
 
1962
The i960 @code{.output} pseudo-op is not supported.
1963
 
1964
@item @code{.setreal} pseudo-op
1965
 
1966
The i960 @code{.setreal} pseudo-op is not supported.
1967
 
1968
@end itemize
1969
 
1970
@node MD
1971
@section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
1972
 
1973
@kindex --MD
1974
@cindex dependency tracking
1975
@cindex make rules
1976
 
1977
@command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates.  This
1978
file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
1979
dependencies of the main source file.
1980
 
1981
The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
1982
 
1983
This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
1984
 
1985
@node o
1986
@section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
1987
 
1988
@kindex -o
1989
@cindex naming object file
1990
@cindex object file name
1991
There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}.  By
1992
default it has the name
1993
@ifset GENERIC
1994
@ifset I960
1995
@file{a.out} (or @file{b.out}, for Intel 960 targets only).
1996
@end ifset
1997
@ifclear I960
1998
@file{a.out}.
1999
@end ifclear
2000
@end ifset
2001
@ifclear GENERIC
2002
@ifset I960
2003
@file{b.out}.
2004
@end ifset
2005
@ifclear I960
2006
@file{a.out}.
2007
@end ifclear
2008
@end ifclear
2009
You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2010
object file a different name.
2011
 
2012
Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2013
existing file of the same name.
2014
 
2015
@node R
2016
@section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2017
 
2018
@kindex -R
2019
@cindex data and text sections, joining
2020
@cindex text and data sections, joining
2021
@cindex joining text and data sections
2022
@cindex merging text and data sections
2023
@option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2024
data-section data lives in the text section.  This is only done at
2025
the very last moment:  your binary data are the same, but data
2026
section parts are relocated differently.  The data section part of
2027
your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2028
appended to the text section.  (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2029
 
2030
When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2031
address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2032
data section).  We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2033
older versions of @command{@value{AS}}.  In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2034
 
2035
@ifset COFF-ELF
2036
When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2037
this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2038
@samp{.data}.
2039
@end ifset
2040
 
2041
@ifset HPPA
2042
@option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets.  Using
2043
@option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2044
@end ifset
2045
 
2046
@node statistics
2047
@section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2048
 
2049
@kindex --statistics
2050
@cindex statistics, about assembly
2051
@cindex time, total for assembly
2052
@cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2053
Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2054
@command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2055
(in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2056
seconds).
2057
 
2058
@node traditional-format
2059
@section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2060
 
2061
@kindex --traditional-format
2062
For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2063
from the output of some existing assembler.  This switch requests
2064
@command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2065
 
2066
For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2067
@command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2068
 
2069
@node v
2070
@section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2071
 
2072
@kindex -v
2073
@kindex -version
2074
@cindex assembler version
2075
@cindex version of assembler
2076
You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2077
option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2078
command line.
2079
 
2080
@node W
2081
@section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2082
 
2083
@command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2084
assembling compiler output.  But programs written by people often
2085
cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2086
made.  All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2087
 
2088
@kindex -W
2089
@kindex --no-warn
2090
@cindex suppressing warnings
2091
@cindex warnings, suppressing
2092
If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2093
This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2094
how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file.  Errors, which stop the assembly,
2095
are still reported.
2096
 
2097
@kindex --fatal-warnings
2098
@cindex errors, caused by warnings
2099
@cindex warnings, causing error
2100
If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2101
files that generate warnings to be in error.
2102
 
2103
@kindex --warn
2104
@cindex warnings, switching on
2105
You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2106
causes warnings to be output as usual.
2107
 
2108
@node Z
2109
@section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2110
@cindex object file, after errors
2111
@cindex errors, continuing after
2112
After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output.  If for
2113
some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2114
@command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2115
option.  If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2116
writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2117
errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2118
 
2119
@node Syntax
2120
@chapter Syntax
2121
 
2122
@cindex machine-independent syntax
2123
@cindex syntax, machine-independent
2124
This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2125
source file.  @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2126
assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2127
@ifclear VAX
2128
assembler.
2129
@end ifclear
2130
@ifset VAX
2131
assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2132
@end ifset
2133
 
2134
@menu
2135
* Preprocessing::              Preprocessing
2136
* Whitespace::                  Whitespace
2137
* Comments::                    Comments
2138
* Symbol Intro::                Symbols
2139
* Statements::                  Statements
2140
* Constants::                   Constants
2141
@end menu
2142
 
2143
@node Preprocessing
2144
@section Preprocessing
2145
 
2146
@cindex preprocessing
2147
The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2148
@itemize @bullet
2149
@cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2150
@item
2151
adjusts and removes extra whitespace.  It leaves one space or tab before
2152
the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2153
a single space.
2154
 
2155
@cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2156
@item
2157
removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2158
appropriate number of newlines.
2159
 
2160
@cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2161
@item
2162
converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2163
@end itemize
2164
 
2165
It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2166
anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor.  You can
2167
do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2168
(@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}).  You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2169
to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2170
@samp{.S} suffix.  @xref{Overall Options, ,Options Controlling the Kind of
2171
Output, gcc.info, Using GNU CC}.
2172
 
2173
Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2174
cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2175
preprocessed.
2176
 
2177
@cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2178
@cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2179
@kindex #NO_APP
2180
@kindex #APP
2181
If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2182
@samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2183
Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2184
specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2185
text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2186
@code{#NO_APP} after this text.  This feature is mainly intend to support
2187
@code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2188
and whitespace.
2189
 
2190
@node Whitespace
2191
@section Whitespace
2192
 
2193
@cindex whitespace
2194
@dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2195
Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2196
people to read.  Unless within character constants
2197
(@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2198
as exactly one space.
2199
 
2200
@node Comments
2201
@section Comments
2202
 
2203
@cindex comments
2204
There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}.  In both
2205
cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2206
 
2207
Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2208
This means you may not nest these comments.
2209
 
2210
@smallexample
2211
/*
2212
  The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2213
  is to use this sort of comment.
2214
*/
2215
 
2216
/* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2217
@end smallexample
2218
 
2219
@cindex line comment character
2220
Anything from the @dfn{line comment} character to the next newline
2221
is considered a comment and is ignored.  The line comment character is
2222
@ifset ARC
2223
@samp{;} on the ARC;
2224
@end ifset
2225
@ifset ARM
2226
@samp{@@} on the ARM;
2227
@end ifset
2228
@ifset H8/300
2229
@samp{;} for the H8/300 family;
2230
@end ifset
2231
@ifset HPPA
2232
@samp{;} for the HPPA;
2233
@end ifset
2234
@ifset I80386
2235
@samp{#} on the i386 and x86-64;
2236
@end ifset
2237
@ifset I960
2238
@samp{#} on the i960;
2239
@end ifset
2240
@ifset PDP11
2241
@samp{;} for the PDP-11;
2242
@end ifset
2243
@ifset PJ
2244
@samp{;} for picoJava;
2245
@end ifset
2246
@ifset PPC
2247
@samp{#} for Motorola PowerPC;
2248
@end ifset
2249
@ifset S390
2250
@samp{#} for IBM S/390;
2251
@end ifset
2252
@ifset SCORE
2253
@samp{#} for the Sunplus SCORE;
2254
@end ifset
2255
@ifset SH
2256
@samp{!} for the Renesas / SuperH SH;
2257
@end ifset
2258
@ifset SPARC
2259
@samp{!} on the SPARC;
2260
@end ifset
2261
@ifset IP2K
2262
@samp{#} on the ip2k;
2263
@end ifset
2264
@ifset M32C
2265
@samp{#} on the m32c;
2266
@end ifset
2267
@ifset M32R
2268
@samp{#} on the m32r;
2269
@end ifset
2270
@ifset M680X0
2271
@samp{|} on the 680x0;
2272
@end ifset
2273
@ifset M68HC11
2274
@samp{#} on the 68HC11 and 68HC12;
2275
@end ifset
2276
@ifset VAX
2277
@samp{#} on the Vax;
2278
@end ifset
2279
@ifset Z80
2280
@samp{;} for the Z80;
2281
@end ifset
2282
@ifset Z8000
2283
@samp{!} for the Z8000;
2284
@end ifset
2285
@ifset V850
2286
@samp{#} on the V850;
2287
@end ifset
2288
@ifset XTENSA
2289
@samp{#} for Xtensa systems;
2290
@end ifset
2291
see @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  @refill
2292
@c FIXME What about i860?
2293
 
2294
@ifset GENERIC
2295
On some machines there are two different line comment characters.  One
2296
character only begins a comment if it is the first non-whitespace character on
2297
a line, while the other always begins a comment.
2298
@end ifset
2299
 
2300
@ifset V850
2301
The V850 assembler also supports a double dash as starting a comment that
2302
extends to the end of the line.
2303
 
2304
@samp{--};
2305
@end ifset
2306
 
2307
@kindex #
2308
@cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2309
@cindex logical line numbers
2310
To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2311
special interpretation.  Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2312
expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2313
line.  Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2314
new logical file name.  The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2315
 
2316
If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2317
the line is ignored.  (Just like a comment.)
2318
 
2319
@smallexample
2320
                          # This is an ordinary comment.
2321
# 42-6 "new_file_name"    # New logical file name
2322
                          # This is logical line # 36.
2323
@end smallexample
2324
This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2325
of @command{@value{AS}}.
2326
 
2327
@node Symbol Intro
2328
@section Symbols
2329
 
2330
@cindex characters used in symbols
2331
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2332
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2333
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2334
@samp{_.$}.
2335
@end ifclear
2336
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2337
@ifclear GENERIC
2338
@ifset H8
2339
A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2340
letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2341
@samp{._$}.  (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2342
symbol names.)
2343
@end ifset
2344
@end ifclear
2345
@end ifset
2346
@ifset GENERIC
2347
On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2348
are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2349
@end ifset
2350
No symbol may begin with a digit.  Case is significant.
2351
There is no length limit: all characters are significant.  Symbols are
2352
delimited by characters not in that set, or by the beginning of a file
2353
(since the source program must end with a newline, the end of a file is
2354
not a possible symbol delimiter).  @xref{Symbols}.
2355
@cindex length of symbols
2356
 
2357
@node Statements
2358
@section Statements
2359
 
2360
@cindex statements, structure of
2361
@cindex line separator character
2362
@cindex statement separator character
2363
@ifclear GENERIC
2364
@ifclear abnormal-separator
2365
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or at a
2366
semicolon (@samp{;}).  The newline or semicolon is considered part of
2367
the preceding statement.  Newlines and semicolons within character
2368
constants are an exception: they do not end statements.
2369
@end ifclear
2370
@ifset abnormal-separator
2371
@ifset HPPA
2372
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or an exclamation
2373
point (@samp{!}).  The newline or exclamation point is considered part of the
2374
preceding statement.  Newlines and exclamation points within character
2375
constants are an exception: they do not end statements.
2376
@end ifset
2377
@ifset H8
2378
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}); or (for the
2379
H8/300) a dollar sign (@samp{$}); or (for the Renesas-SH) a semicolon
2380
(@samp{;}).  The newline or separator character is considered part of
2381
the preceding statement.  Newlines and separators within character
2382
constants are an exception: they do not end statements.
2383
@end ifset
2384
@end ifset
2385
@end ifclear
2386
@ifset GENERIC
2387
A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or line
2388
separator character.  (The line separator is usually @samp{;}, unless this
2389
conflicts with the comment character; see @ref{Machine Dependencies}.)  The
2390
newline or separator character is considered part of the preceding
2391
statement.  Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2392
exception: they do not end statements.
2393
@end ifset
2394
 
2395
@cindex newline, required at file end
2396
@cindex EOF, newline must precede
2397
It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file:  the last
2398
character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2399
 
2400
An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace.  It is ignored.
2401
 
2402
@cindex instructions and directives
2403
@cindex directives and instructions
2404
@c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2405
@c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously...  doc@cygnus.com,
2406
@c 13feb91.
2407
A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2408
key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is.  The key
2409
symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement.  If the
2410
symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2411
directive: typically valid for any computer.  If the symbol begins with
2412
a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2413
assembles into a machine language instruction.
2414
@ifset GENERIC
2415
Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
2416
recognize different instructions.  In fact, the same symbol may
2417
represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
2418
language.@refill
2419
@end ifset
2420
 
2421
@cindex @code{:} (label)
2422
@cindex label (@code{:})
2423
A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
2424
Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
2425
have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
2426
 
2427
@ifset HPPA
2428
For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
2429
the definition of a label must begin in column zero.  This also implies that
2430
only one label may be defined on each line.
2431
@end ifset
2432
 
2433
@smallexample
2434
label:     .directive    followed by something
2435
another_label:           # This is an empty statement.
2436
           instruction   operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
2437
@end smallexample
2438
 
2439
@node Constants
2440
@section Constants
2441
 
2442
@cindex constants
2443
A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
2444
inspection, without knowing any context.  Like this:
2445
@smallexample
2446
@group
2447
.byte  74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
2448
.ascii "Ring the bell\7"                  # A string constant.
2449
.octa  0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
2450
.float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
2451
95028841971.693993751E-40                 # - pi, a flonum.
2452
@end group
2453
@end smallexample
2454
 
2455
@menu
2456
* Characters::                  Character Constants
2457
* Numbers::                     Number Constants
2458
@end menu
2459
 
2460
@node Characters
2461
@subsection Character Constants
2462
 
2463
@cindex character constants
2464
@cindex constants, character
2465
There are two kinds of character constants.  A @dfn{character} stands
2466
for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
2467
numeric expressions.  String constants (properly called string
2468
@emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
2469
used in arithmetic expressions.
2470
 
2471
@menu
2472
* Strings::                     Strings
2473
* Chars::                       Characters
2474
@end menu
2475
 
2476
@node Strings
2477
@subsubsection Strings
2478
 
2479
@cindex string constants
2480
@cindex constants, string
2481
A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes.  It may contain
2482
double-quotes or null characters.  The way to get special characters
2483
into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
2484
a backslash @samp{\} character.  For example @samp{\\} represents
2485
one backslash:  the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
2486
@command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
2487
(which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
2488
escape character).  The complete list of escapes follows.
2489
 
2490
@cindex escape codes, character
2491
@cindex character escape codes
2492
@table @kbd
2493
@c      @item \a
2494
@c      Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
2495
@c
2496
@cindex @code{\b} (backspace character)
2497
@cindex backspace (@code{\b})
2498
@item \b
2499
Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
2500
 
2501
@c      @item \e
2502
@c      Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
2503
@c
2504
@cindex @code{\f} (formfeed character)
2505
@cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
2506
@item \f
2507
Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
2508
 
2509
@cindex @code{\n} (newline character)
2510
@cindex newline (@code{\n})
2511
@item \n
2512
Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
2513
 
2514
@c      @item \p
2515
@c      Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
2516
@c
2517
@cindex @code{\r} (carriage return character)
2518
@cindex carriage return (@code{\r})
2519
@item \r
2520
Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
2521
 
2522
@c      @item \s
2523
@c      Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040.  Included for compliance with
2524
@c      other assemblers.
2525
@c
2526
@cindex @code{\t} (tab)
2527
@cindex tab (@code{\t})
2528
@item \t
2529
Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
2530
 
2531
@c      @item \v
2532
@c      Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
2533
@c      @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2534
@c      A hexadecimal character code.  The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
2535
@c
2536
@cindex @code{\@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
2537
@cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
2538
@item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
2539
An octal character code.  The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
2540
For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
2541
for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
2542
 
2543
@cindex @code{\@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
2544
@cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
2545
@item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
2546
A hex character code.  All trailing hex digits are combined.  Either upper or
2547
lower case @code{x} works.
2548
 
2549
@cindex @code{\\} (@samp{\} character)
2550
@cindex backslash (@code{\\})
2551
@item \\
2552
Represents one @samp{\} character.
2553
 
2554
@c      @item \'
2555
@c      Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
2556
@c      This is needed in single character literals
2557
@c      (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
2558
@c      a @samp{'}.
2559
@c
2560
@cindex @code{\"} (doublequote character)
2561
@cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
2562
@item \"
2563
Represents one @samp{"} character.  Needed in strings to represent
2564
this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
2565
 
2566
@item \ @var{anything-else}
2567
Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
2568
assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present.  The idea is that if
2569
you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
2570
interpretation of the following character.  However @command{@value{AS}} has no
2571
other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
2572
code and warns you of the fact.
2573
@end table
2574
 
2575
Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
2576
varies widely among assemblers.  The current set is what we think
2577
the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
2578
compilers recognize.  If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
2579
sequence.
2580
 
2581
@node Chars
2582
@subsubsection Characters
2583
 
2584
@cindex single character constant
2585
@cindex character, single
2586
@cindex constant, single character
2587
A single character may be written as a single quote immediately
2588
followed by that character.  The same escapes apply to characters as
2589
to strings.  So if you want to write the character backslash, you
2590
must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes the second
2591
@code{\}.  As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a
2592
grave accent.  A newline
2593
@ifclear GENERIC
2594
@ifclear abnormal-separator
2595
(or semicolon @samp{;})
2596
@end ifclear
2597
@ifset abnormal-separator
2598
@ifset H8
2599
(or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
2600
Renesas SH)
2601
@end ifset
2602
@end ifset
2603
@end ifclear
2604
immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
2605
and does not count as the end of a statement.  The value of a character
2606
constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
2607
that character.  @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
2608
@kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
2609
 
2610
@node Numbers
2611
@subsection Number Constants
2612
 
2613
@cindex constants, number
2614
@cindex number constants
2615
@command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
2616
are stored in the target machine.  @emph{Integers} are numbers that
2617
would fit into an @code{int} in the C language.  @emph{Bignums} are
2618
integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits.  @emph{Flonums}
2619
are floating point numbers, described below.
2620
 
2621
@menu
2622
* Integers::                    Integers
2623
* Bignums::                     Bignums
2624
* Flonums::                     Flonums
2625
@ifclear GENERIC
2626
@ifset I960
2627
* Bit Fields::                  Bit Fields
2628
@end ifset
2629
@end ifclear
2630
@end menu
2631
 
2632
@node Integers
2633
@subsubsection Integers
2634
@cindex integers
2635
@cindex constants, integer
2636
 
2637
@cindex binary integers
2638
@cindex integers, binary
2639
A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
2640
the binary digits @samp{01}.
2641
 
2642
@cindex octal integers
2643
@cindex integers, octal
2644
An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
2645
digits (@samp{01234567}).
2646
 
2647
@cindex decimal integers
2648
@cindex integers, decimal
2649
A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
2650
more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
2651
 
2652
@cindex hexadecimal integers
2653
@cindex integers, hexadecimal
2654
A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
2655
more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
2656
 
2657
Integers have the usual values.  To denote a negative integer, use
2658
the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
2659
(@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
2660
 
2661
@node Bignums
2662
@subsubsection Bignums
2663
 
2664
@cindex bignums
2665
@cindex constants, bignum
2666
A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
2667
except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
2668
represent in binary.  The distinction is made because in some places
2669
integers are permitted while bignums are not.
2670
 
2671
@node Flonums
2672
@subsubsection Flonums
2673
@cindex flonums
2674
@cindex floating point numbers
2675
@cindex constants, floating point
2676
 
2677
@cindex precision, floating point
2678
A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number.  The translation is
2679
indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
2680
@command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
2681
sufficient precision.  This generic floating point number is converted
2682
to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
2683
portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
2684
 
2685
A flonum is written by writing (in order)
2686
@itemize @bullet
2687
@item
2688
The digit @samp{0}.
2689
@ifset HPPA
2690
(@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
2691
@end ifset
2692
 
2693
@item
2694
A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
2695
@ifset GENERIC
2696
@kbd{e} is recommended.  Case is not important.
2697
@ignore
2698
@c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
2699
(Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed.  Vax BSD
2700
4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
2701
@end ignore
2702
 
2703
On the H8/300, Renesas / SuperH SH,
2704
and AMD 29K architectures, the letter must be
2705
one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2706
 
2707
On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
2708
(in upper or lower case).
2709
 
2710
On the Intel 960 architecture, the letter must be
2711
one of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2712
 
2713
On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
2714
@end ifset
2715
@ifclear GENERIC
2716
@ifset ARC
2717
One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
2718
@end ifset
2719
@ifset H8
2720
One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
2721
@end ifset
2722
@ifset HPPA
2723
The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
2724
@end ifset
2725
@ifset I960
2726
One of the letters @samp{DFT} (in upper or lower case).
2727
@end ifset
2728
@end ifclear
2729
 
2730
@item
2731
An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2732
 
2733
@item
2734
An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
2735
 
2736
@item
2737
An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
2738
or more decimal digits.
2739
 
2740
@item
2741
An optional exponent, consisting of:
2742
 
2743
@itemize @bullet
2744
@item
2745
An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
2746
@c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
2747
@c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
2748
@item
2749
Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
2750
@item
2751
One or more decimal digits.
2752
@end itemize
2753
 
2754
@end itemize
2755
 
2756
At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
2757
present.  The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
2758
 
2759
@command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers.  Flonums are computed
2760
independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
2761
@command{@value{AS}}.
2762
 
2763
@ifclear GENERIC
2764
@ifset I960
2765
@c Bit fields are written as a general facility but are also controlled
2766
@c by a conditional-compilation flag---which is as of now (21mar91)
2767
@c turned on only by the i960 config of GAS.
2768
@node Bit Fields
2769
@subsubsection Bit Fields
2770
 
2771
@cindex bit fields
2772
@cindex constants, bit field
2773
You can also define numeric constants as @dfn{bit fields}.
2774
Specify two numbers separated by a colon---
2775
@example
2776
@var{mask}:@var{value}
2777
@end example
2778
@noindent
2779
@command{@value{AS}} applies a bitwise @sc{and} between @var{mask} and
2780
@var{value}.
2781
 
2782
The resulting number is then packed
2783
@ifset GENERIC
2784
@c this conditional paren in case bit fields turned on elsewhere than 960
2785
(in host-dependent byte order)
2786
@end ifset
2787
into a field whose width depends on which assembler directive has the
2788
bit-field as its argument.  Overflow (a result from the bitwise and
2789
requiring more binary digits to represent) is not an error; instead,
2790
more constants are generated, of the specified width, beginning with the
2791
least significant digits.@refill
2792
 
2793
The directives @code{.byte}, @code{.hword}, @code{.int}, @code{.long},
2794
@code{.short}, and @code{.word} accept bit-field arguments.
2795
@end ifset
2796
@end ifclear
2797
 
2798
@node Sections
2799
@chapter Sections and Relocation
2800
@cindex sections
2801
@cindex relocation
2802
 
2803
@menu
2804
* Secs Background::             Background
2805
* Ld Sections::                 Linker Sections
2806
* As Sections::                 Assembler Internal Sections
2807
* Sub-Sections::                Sub-Sections
2808
* bss::                         bss Section
2809
@end menu
2810
 
2811
@node Secs Background
2812
@section Background
2813
 
2814
Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
2815
``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
2816
For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
2817
 
2818
@cindex linker, and assembler
2819
@cindex assembler, and linker
2820
The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
2821
combines their contents to form a runnable program.  When @command{@value{AS}}
2822
emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
2823
@code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
2824
different partial programs do not overlap.  This is actually an
2825
oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
2826
sections.
2827
 
2828
@code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
2829
addresses.  These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
2830
units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
2831
within them.  Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}.  Assigning
2832
run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}.  It includes
2833
the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
2834
the proper run-time addresses.
2835
@ifset H8
2836
For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
2837
@command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
2838
ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
2839
@end ifset
2840
 
2841
@cindex standard assembler sections
2842
An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
2843
of which may be empty.  These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
2844
@dfn{bss} sections.
2845
 
2846
@ifset COFF-ELF
2847
@ifset GENERIC
2848
When it generates COFF or ELF output,
2849
@end ifset
2850
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
2851
using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
2852
If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
2853
or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
2854
@end ifset
2855
 
2856
@ifset HPPA
2857
@ifset GENERIC
2858
When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
2859
@end ifset
2860
@command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
2861
specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives.  See
2862
@cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
2863
(HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
2864
assembler directives.
2865
 
2866
@ifset SOM
2867
Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
2868
text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output.  Program text
2869
is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
2870
BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
2871
@end ifset
2872
@end ifset
2873
 
2874
Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
2875
data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
2876
 
2877
@ifset HPPA
2878
When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
2879
section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
2880
@code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
2881
@end ifset
2882
 
2883
To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
2884
relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
2885
object file details of the relocation needed.  To perform relocation
2886
@code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
2887
file is mentioned:
2888
@itemize @bullet
2889
@item
2890
Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
2891
an address?
2892
@item
2893
How long (in bytes) is this reference?
2894
@item
2895
Which section does the address refer to?  What is the numeric value of
2896
@display
2897
(@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
2898
@end display
2899
@item
2900
Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
2901
@end itemize
2902
 
2903
@cindex addresses, format of
2904
@cindex section-relative addressing
2905
In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
2906
@display
2907
(@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
2908
@end display
2909
@noindent
2910
Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
2911
nature.
2912
@ifset SOM
2913
(For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
2914
symbol-relative instead.)
2915
@end ifset
2916
 
2917
In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
2918
@var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
2919
 
2920
Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
2921
@dfn{absolute} section.  When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
2922
addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged.  For example, address
2923
@code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
2924
@code{@value{LD}}.  Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
2925
data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
2926
their absolute sections must overlap.  Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
2927
part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
2928
address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
2929
 
2930
The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section.  Any
2931
address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
2932
rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
2933
Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
2934
address is to mention an undefined symbol.  A reference to a named
2935
common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
2936
time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
2937
 
2938
By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
2939
the linked program.  @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
2940
sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program.  It is
2941
customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
2942
the addresses of all partial programs' text sections.  Likewise for
2943
data and bss sections.
2944
 
2945
Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
2946
use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
2947
 
2948
@node Ld Sections
2949
@section Linker Sections
2950
@code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
2951
 
2952
@table @strong
2953
 
2954
@ifset COFF-ELF
2955
@cindex named sections
2956
@cindex sections, named
2957
@item named sections
2958
@end ifset
2959
@ifset aout-bout
2960
@cindex text section
2961
@cindex data section
2962
@itemx text section
2963
@itemx data section
2964
@end ifset
2965
These sections hold your program.  @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
2966
separate but equal sections.  Anything you can say of one section is
2967
true of another.
2968
@c @ifset aout-bout
2969
When the program is running, however, it is
2970
customary for the text section to be unalterable.  The
2971
text section is often shared among processes: it contains
2972
instructions, constants and the like.  The data section of a running
2973
program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
2974
in the data section.
2975
@c @end ifset
2976
 
2977
@cindex bss section
2978
@item bss section
2979
This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running.  It
2980
is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage.  The length of
2981
each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
2982
out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
2983
bytes in the object file.  The bss section was invented to eliminate
2984
those explicit zeros from object files.
2985
 
2986
@cindex absolute section
2987
@item absolute section
2988
Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
2989
This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
2990
not change when relocating.  In this sense we speak of absolute
2991
addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
2992
 
2993
@cindex undefined section
2994
@item undefined section
2995
This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
2996
the preceding sections.
2997
@c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
2998
@end table
2999
 
3000
@cindex relocation example
3001
An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3002
@ifset COFF-ELF
3003
The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3004
@end ifset
3005
Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3006
 
3007
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3008
@ifnottex
3009
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3010
@smallexample
3011
                      +-----+----+--+
3012
partial program # 1:  |ttttt|dddd|00|
3013
                      +-----+----+--+
3014
 
3015
                      text   data bss
3016
                      seg.   seg. seg.
3017
 
3018
                      +---+---+---+
3019
partial program # 2:  |TTT|DDD|000|
3020
                      +---+---+---+
3021
 
3022
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3023
linked program:       |  |TTT|ttttt|  |dddd|DDD|00000|
3024
                      +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3025
 
3026
    addresses:        0 @dots{}
3027
@end smallexample
3028
@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3029
@end ifnottex
3030
@need 5000
3031
@tex
3032
\bigskip
3033
\line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3034
\line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3035
\line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3036
 
3037
\line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3038
\line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3039
\line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3040
 
3041
\line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3042
\line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3043
\line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3044
ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3045
DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3046
 
3047
\line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3048
\line{0\dots\hfil}
3049
 
3050
@end tex
3051
@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3052
 
3053
@node As Sections
3054
@section Assembler Internal Sections
3055
 
3056
@cindex internal assembler sections
3057
@cindex sections in messages, internal
3058
These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}.  They
3059
have no meaning at run-time.  You do not really need to know about these
3060
sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3061
warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3062
meanings to @command{@value{AS}}.  These sections are used to permit the
3063
value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3064
section-relative address.
3065
 
3066
@table @b
3067
@cindex assembler internal logic error
3068
@item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3069
An internal assembler logic error has been found.  This means there is a
3070
bug in the assembler.
3071
 
3072
@cindex expr (internal section)
3073
@item expr section
3074
The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3075
symbols.  When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3076
it in the expr section.
3077
@c FIXME item debug
3078
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3079
@c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3080
@c FIXME item register
3081
@end table
3082
 
3083
@node Sub-Sections
3084
@section Sub-Sections
3085
 
3086
@cindex numbered subsections
3087
@cindex grouping data
3088
@ifset aout-bout
3089
Assembled bytes
3090
@ifset COFF-ELF
3091
conventionally
3092
@end ifset
3093
fall into two sections: text and data.
3094
@end ifset
3095
You may have separate groups of
3096
@ifset GENERIC
3097
data in named sections
3098
@end ifset
3099
@ifclear GENERIC
3100
@ifclear aout-bout
3101
data in named sections
3102
@end ifclear
3103
@ifset aout-bout
3104
text or data
3105
@end ifset
3106
@end ifclear
3107
that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3108
are not contiguous in the assembler source.  @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3109
use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose.  Within each section, there can be
3110
numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192.  Objects assembled into the
3111
same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3112
subsection.  For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3113
section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3114
assembled.  In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3115
section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3116
constants being output.
3117
 
3118
Subsections are optional.  If you do not use subsections, everything
3119
goes in subsection number zero.
3120
 
3121
@ifset GENERIC
3122
Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3123
(Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3124
of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3125
@end ifset
3126
@ifclear GENERIC
3127
@ifset H8
3128
On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3129
boundary (two bytes).
3130
The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3131
@end ifset
3132
@ifset I960
3133
@c FIXME section padding (alignment)?
3134
@c Rich Pixley says padding here depends on target obj code format; that
3135
@c doesn't seem particularly useful to say without further elaboration,
3136
@c so for now I say nothing about it.  If this is a generic BFD issue,
3137
@c these paragraphs might need to vanish from this manual, and be
3138
@c discussed in BFD chapter of binutils (or some such).
3139
@end ifset
3140
@end ifclear
3141
 
3142
Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3143
to highest.  (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3144
The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3145
other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3146
They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3147
data subsections as a data section.
3148
 
3149
To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3150
into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3151
@var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3152
@ifset COFF
3153
@ifset GENERIC
3154
When generating COFF output, you
3155
@end ifset
3156
@ifclear GENERIC
3157
You
3158
@end ifclear
3159
can also use an extra subsection
3160
argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3161
@var{expression}}.
3162
@end ifset
3163
@ifset ELF
3164
@ifset GENERIC
3165
When generating ELF output, you
3166
@end ifset
3167
@ifclear GENERIC
3168
You
3169
@end ifclear
3170
can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3171
to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3172
@end ifset
3173
@var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3174
(@pxref{Expressions}).  If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3175
is assumed.  Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}.  Assembly
3176
begins in @code{text 0}.  For instance:
3177
@smallexample
3178
.text 0     # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3179
.ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3180
.text 1
3181
.ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3182
.data 0
3183
.ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3184
.ascii "in the first data subsection."
3185
.text 0
3186
.ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3187
.ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3188
@end smallexample
3189
 
3190
Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3191
assembled into that section.  Because subsections are merely a convenience
3192
restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3193
counter.  There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3194
@code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3195
current value.  The location counter of the section where statements are being
3196
assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3197
 
3198
@node bss
3199
@section bss Section
3200
 
3201
@cindex bss section
3202
@cindex common variable storage
3203
The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3204
You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3205
not dictate data to load into it before your program executes.  When
3206
your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3207
section are zeroed bytes.
3208
 
3209
The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3210
@ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3211
 
3212
The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3213
another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3214
 
3215
@ifset GENERIC
3216
When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3217
COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3218
see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}.  You may only assemble zero values into the
3219
section.  Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3220
@code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3221
@end ifset
3222
 
3223
@node Symbols
3224
@chapter Symbols
3225
 
3226
@cindex symbols
3227
Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3228
things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3229
to debug.
3230
 
3231
@quotation
3232
@cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3233
@emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3234
the same order they were declared.  This may break some debuggers.
3235
@end quotation
3236
 
3237
@menu
3238
* Labels::                      Labels
3239
* Setting Symbols::             Giving Symbols Other Values
3240
* Symbol Names::                Symbol Names
3241
* Dot::                         The Special Dot Symbol
3242
* Symbol Attributes::           Symbol Attributes
3243
@end menu
3244
 
3245
@node Labels
3246
@section Labels
3247
 
3248
@cindex labels
3249
A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3250
@samp{:}.  The symbol then represents the current value of the
3251
active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3252
operand.  You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3253
different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3254
definitions.
3255
 
3256
@ifset HPPA
3257
On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3258
colon, but instead must start in column zero.  Only one label may be defined on
3259
a single line.  To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3260
provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3261
@end ifset
3262
 
3263
@node Setting Symbols
3264
@section Giving Symbols Other Values
3265
 
3266
@cindex assigning values to symbols
3267
@cindex symbol values, assigning
3268
A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3269
by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3270
(@pxref{Expressions}).  This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3271
directive.  @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}.  In the same way, using a double
3272
equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3273
@code{.eqv} directive.  @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3274
 
3275
@ifset Blackfin
3276
Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3277
@end ifset
3278
 
3279
@node Symbol Names
3280
@section Symbol Names
3281
 
3282
@cindex symbol names
3283
@cindex names, symbol
3284
@ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3285
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On most
3286
machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3287
noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.  That character may be followed by any
3288
string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3289
particular target machine), and underscores.
3290
@end ifclear
3291
@ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3292
@ifset H8
3293
Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}.  On the
3294
Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names.  That
3295
character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3296
on the H8/300), and underscores.
3297
@end ifset
3298
@end ifset
3299
 
3300
Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3301
than @code{Foo}.
3302
 
3303
Each symbol has exactly one name.  Each name in an assembly language program
3304
refers to exactly one symbol.  You may use that symbol name any number of times
3305
in a program.
3306
 
3307
@subheading Local Symbol Names
3308
 
3309
@cindex local symbol names
3310
@cindex symbol names, local
3311
A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3312
By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3313
@samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3314
set of local label prefixes.
3315
@ifset HPPA
3316
On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3317
@end ifset
3318
 
3319
Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3320
normally not saved in object files.  Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3321
You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols:
3322
@option{-L}}) to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3323
 
3324
@subheading Local Labels
3325
 
3326
@cindex local labels
3327
@cindex temporary symbol names
3328
@cindex symbol names, temporary
3329
Local labels help compilers and programmers use names temporarily.
3330
They create symbols which are guaranteed to be unique over the entire scope of
3331
the input source code and which can be referred to by a simple notation.
3332
To define a local label, write a label of the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N}
3333
represents any positive integer).  To refer to the most recent previous
3334
definition of that label write @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when
3335
you defined the label.  To refer to the next definition of a local label, write
3336
@samp{@b{N}f}---the @samp{b} stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands
3337
for ``forwards''.
3338
 
3339
There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3340
too.  So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3341
the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3342
defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3343
definition of a specific local label for a forward reference.  It is also worth
3344
noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3345
implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3346
 
3347
Here is an example:
3348
 
3349
@smallexample
3350
1:        branch 1f
3351
2:        branch 1b
3352
1:        branch 2f
3353
2:        branch 1b
3354
@end smallexample
3355
 
3356
Which is the equivalent of:
3357
 
3358
@smallexample
3359
label_1:  branch label_3
3360
label_2:  branch label_1
3361
label_3:  branch label_4
3362
label_4:  branch label_3
3363
@end smallexample
3364
 
3365
Local label names are only a notational device.  They are immediately
3366
transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3367
The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3368
are optionally emitted to the object file.  The names are constructed using
3369
these parts:
3370
 
3371
@table @code
3372
@item @emph{local label prefix}
3373
All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3374
Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3375
that start with the local label prefix.  These labels are
3376
used for symbols you are never intended to see.  If you use the
3377
@samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3378
object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3379
you may use them in debugging.
3380
 
3381
@item @var{number}
3382
This is the number that was used in the local label definition.  So if the
3383
label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3384
 
3385
@item @kbd{C-B}
3386
This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3387
of the same name.  The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3388
 
3389
@item @emph{ordinal number}
3390
This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct.  The first definition of
3391
@samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}.  The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3392
number @samp{15}, and so on.  Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3393
the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3394
@end table
3395
 
3396
So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3397
the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3398
 
3399
@subheading Dollar Local Labels
3400
@cindex dollar local symbols
3401
 
3402
@code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of local labels called
3403
dollar labels.  These labels go out of scope (i.e., they become undefined) as
3404
soon as a non-local label is defined.  Thus they remain valid for only a small
3405
region of the input source code.  Normal local labels, by contrast, remain in
3406
scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined by another occurrence of
3407
the same local label.
3408
 
3409
Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3410
except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3411
@samp{@b{55$:}}.
3412
 
3413
They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3414
names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3415
to distinguish them from ordinary labels.  For example, the fifth definition of
3416
@samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3417
 
3418
@node Dot
3419
@section The Special Dot Symbol
3420
 
3421
@cindex dot (symbol)
3422
@cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3423
@cindex current address
3424
@cindex location counter
3425
The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3426
@command{@value{AS}} is assembling into.  Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3427
.long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3428
Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3429
directive.
3430
@ifclear no-space-dir
3431
Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3432
@samp{.space 4}.
3433
@end ifclear
3434
 
3435
@node Symbol Attributes
3436
@section Symbol Attributes
3437
 
3438
@cindex symbol attributes
3439
@cindex attributes, symbol
3440
Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3441
``Type''.  Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3442
attributes.
3443
@ifset INTERNALS
3444
The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3445
@end ifset
3446
 
3447
If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3448
all these attributes, and probably won't warn you.  This makes the
3449
symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3450
would want.
3451
 
3452
@menu
3453
* Symbol Value::                Value
3454
* Symbol Type::                 Type
3455
@ifset aout-bout
3456
@ifset GENERIC
3457
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3458
@end ifset
3459
@ifclear GENERIC
3460
@ifclear BOUT
3461
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3462
@end ifclear
3463
@ifset BOUT
3464
* a.out Symbols::               Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3465
@end ifset
3466
@end ifclear
3467
@end ifset
3468
@ifset COFF
3469
* COFF Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for COFF
3470
@end ifset
3471
@ifset SOM
3472
* SOM Symbols::                Symbol Attributes for SOM
3473
@end ifset
3474
@end menu
3475
 
3476
@node Symbol Value
3477
@subsection Value
3478
 
3479
@cindex value of a symbol
3480
@cindex symbol value
3481
The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits.  For a symbol which labels a
3482
location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
3483
number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
3484
Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
3485
as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking.  Absolute
3486
symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
3487
called absolute.
3488
 
3489
The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way.  If it is
3490
 
3491
@code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
3492
same program.  You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
3493
name without defining it.  A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
3494
common declaration.  The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
3495
bytes (addresses).  The symbol refers to the first address of the
3496
allocated storage.
3497
 
3498
@node Symbol Type
3499
@subsection Type
3500
 
3501
@cindex type of a symbol
3502
@cindex symbol type
3503
The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
3504
information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
3505
(optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers.  The exact
3506
format depends on the object-code output format in use.
3507
 
3508
@ifset aout-bout
3509
@ifclear GENERIC
3510
@ifset BOUT
3511
@c The following avoids a "widow" subsection title.  @group would be
3512
@c better if it were available outside examples.
3513
@need 1000
3514
@node a.out Symbols
3515
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}, @code{b.out}
3516
 
3517
@cindex @code{b.out} symbol attributes
3518
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{b.out}
3519
These symbol attributes appear only when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for
3520
one of the Berkeley-descended object output formats---@code{a.out} or
3521
@code{b.out}.
3522
 
3523
@end ifset
3524
@ifclear BOUT
3525
@node a.out Symbols
3526
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3527
 
3528
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3529
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3530
 
3531
@end ifclear
3532
@end ifclear
3533
@ifset GENERIC
3534
@node a.out Symbols
3535
@subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
3536
 
3537
@cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
3538
@cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
3539
 
3540
@end ifset
3541
@menu
3542
* Symbol Desc::                 Descriptor
3543
* Symbol Other::                Other
3544
@end menu
3545
 
3546
@node Symbol Desc
3547
@subsubsection Descriptor
3548
 
3549
@cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
3550
This is an arbitrary 16-bit value.  You may establish a symbol's
3551
descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
3552
(@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}).  A descriptor value means nothing to
3553
@command{@value{AS}}.
3554
 
3555
@node Symbol Other
3556
@subsubsection Other
3557
 
3558
@cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
3559
This is an arbitrary 8-bit value.  It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
3560
@end ifset
3561
 
3562
@ifset COFF
3563
@node COFF Symbols
3564
@subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
3565
 
3566
@cindex COFF symbol attributes
3567
@cindex symbol attributes, COFF
3568
 
3569
The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
3570
like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
3571
@code{.endef} directives.
3572
 
3573
@subsubsection Primary Attributes
3574
 
3575
@cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
3576
The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
3577
respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
3578
 
3579
@subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
3580
 
3581
@cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
3582
The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
3583
@code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
3584
table information for COFF.
3585
@end ifset
3586
 
3587
@ifset SOM
3588
@node SOM Symbols
3589
@subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
3590
 
3591
@cindex SOM symbol attributes
3592
@cindex symbol attributes, SOM
3593
 
3594
The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
3595
the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
3596
 
3597
The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
3598
Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
3599
@code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
3600
@end ifset
3601
 
3602
@node Expressions
3603
@chapter Expressions
3604
 
3605
@cindex expressions
3606
@cindex addresses
3607
@cindex numeric values
3608
An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
3609
Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
3610
 
3611
The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
3612
a particular section.  If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
3613
enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
3614
section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
3615
the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
3616
@command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
3617
 
3618
@menu
3619
* Empty Exprs::                 Empty Expressions
3620
* Integer Exprs::               Integer Expressions
3621
@end menu
3622
 
3623
@node Empty Exprs
3624
@section Empty Expressions
3625
 
3626
@cindex empty expressions
3627
@cindex expressions, empty
3628
An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
3629
Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
3630
expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0.  This
3631
is compatible with other assemblers.
3632
 
3633
@node Integer Exprs
3634
@section Integer Expressions
3635
 
3636
@cindex integer expressions
3637
@cindex expressions, integer
3638
An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
3639
by @emph{operators}.
3640
 
3641
@menu
3642
* Arguments::                   Arguments
3643
* Operators::                   Operators
3644
* Prefix Ops::                  Prefix Operators
3645
* Infix Ops::                   Infix Operators
3646
@end menu
3647
 
3648
@node Arguments
3649
@subsection Arguments
3650
 
3651
@cindex expression arguments
3652
@cindex arguments in expressions
3653
@cindex operands in expressions
3654
@cindex arithmetic operands
3655
@dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions.  In other
3656
contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''.  In
3657
this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
3658
the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
3659
expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
3660
instruction operands.
3661
 
3662
Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
3663
@var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
3664
or undefined.  @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
3665
integer.
3666
 
3667
Numbers are usually integers.
3668
 
3669
A number can be a flonum or bignum.  In this case, you are warned
3670
that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
3671
these 32 bits are an integer.  You may write integer-manipulating
3672
instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
3673
assemblers.
3674
 
3675
@cindex subexpressions
3676
Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
3677
expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
3678
operator followed by an argument.
3679
 
3680
@node Operators
3681
@subsection Operators
3682
 
3683
@cindex operators, in expressions
3684
@cindex arithmetic functions
3685
@cindex functions, in expressions
3686
@dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}.  Prefix
3687
operators are followed by an argument.  Infix operators appear
3688
between their arguments.  Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
3689
whitespace.
3690
 
3691
@node Prefix Ops
3692
@subsection Prefix Operator
3693
 
3694
@cindex prefix operators
3695
@command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}.  They each take
3696
one argument, which must be absolute.
3697
 
3698
@c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
3699
@c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
3700
@c section (which is inside an enumerate).
3701
@tex
3702
\global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
3703
@end tex
3704
 
3705
@table @code
3706
@item -
3707
@dfn{Negation}.  Two's complement negation.
3708
@item ~
3709
@dfn{Complementation}.  Bitwise not.
3710
@end table
3711
 
3712
@tex
3713
\global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
3714
@end tex
3715
 
3716
@node Infix Ops
3717
@subsection Infix Operators
3718
 
3719
@cindex infix operators
3720
@cindex operators, permitted arguments
3721
@dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side.  Operators
3722
have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
3723
to right.  Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
3724
absolute, and the result is absolute.
3725
 
3726
@enumerate
3727
@cindex operator precedence
3728
@cindex precedence of operators
3729
 
3730
@item
3731
Highest Precedence
3732
 
3733
@table @code
3734
@item *
3735
@dfn{Multiplication}.
3736
 
3737
@item /
3738
@dfn{Division}.  Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
3739
 
3740
@item %
3741
@dfn{Remainder}.
3742
 
3743
@item <<
3744
@dfn{Shift Left}.  Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
3745
 
3746
@item >>
3747
@dfn{Shift Right}.  Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
3748
@end table
3749
 
3750
@item
3751
Intermediate precedence
3752
 
3753
@table @code
3754
@item |
3755
 
3756
@dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
3757
 
3758
@item &
3759
@dfn{Bitwise And}.
3760
 
3761
@item ^
3762
@dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
3763
 
3764
@item !
3765
@dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
3766
@end table
3767
 
3768
@item
3769
Low Precedence
3770
 
3771
@table @code
3772
@cindex addition, permitted arguments
3773
@cindex plus, permitted arguments
3774
@cindex arguments for addition
3775
@item +
3776
@dfn{Addition}.  If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
3777
the other argument.  You may not add together arguments from different
3778
sections.
3779
 
3780
@cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
3781
@cindex minus, permitted arguments
3782
@cindex arguments for subtraction
3783
@item -
3784
@dfn{Subtraction}.  If the right argument is absolute, the
3785
result has the section of the left argument.
3786
If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
3787
You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
3788
@c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
3789
 
3790
@cindex comparison expressions
3791
@cindex expressions, comparison
3792
@item  ==
3793
@dfn{Is Equal To}
3794
@item <>
3795
@itemx !=
3796
@dfn{Is Not Equal To}
3797
@item <
3798
@dfn{Is Less Than}
3799
@item >
3800
@dfn{Is Greater Than}
3801
@item >=
3802
@dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
3803
@item <=
3804
@dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
3805
 
3806
The comparison operators can be used as infix operators.  A true results has a
3807
value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0.   Note, these operators
3808
perform signed comparisons.
3809
@end table
3810
 
3811
@item Lowest Precedence
3812
 
3813
@table @code
3814
@item &&
3815
@dfn{Logical And}.
3816
 
3817
@item ||
3818
@dfn{Logical Or}.
3819
 
3820
These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
3821
expressions.  Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
3822
value of 1 but a false results does still return 0.  Also note that the logical
3823
or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
3824
 
3825
@end table
3826
@end enumerate
3827
 
3828
In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
3829
address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
3830
 
3831
@node Pseudo Ops
3832
@chapter Assembler Directives
3833
 
3834
@cindex directives, machine independent
3835
@cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
3836
@cindex machine independent directives
3837
All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
3838
The rest of the name is letters, usually in lower case.
3839
 
3840
This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
3841
target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
3842
@ifset GENERIC
3843
Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
3844
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
3845
@end ifset
3846
@ifclear GENERIC
3847
@ifset machine-directives
3848
@xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
3849
@end ifset
3850
@end ifclear
3851
 
3852
@menu
3853
* Abort::                       @code{.abort}
3854
@ifset COFF
3855
* ABORT (COFF)::                @code{.ABORT}
3856
@end ifset
3857
 
3858
* Align::                       @code{.align @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3859
* Altmacro::                    @code{.altmacro}
3860
* Ascii::                       @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3861
* Asciz::                       @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
3862
* Balign::                      @code{.balign @var{abs-expr} , @var{abs-expr}}
3863
* Byte::                        @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
3864
* CFI directives::              @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
3865
* Comm::                        @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
3866
* Data::                        @code{.data @var{subsection}}
3867
@ifset COFF
3868
* Def::                         @code{.def @var{name}}
3869
@end ifset
3870
@ifset aout-bout
3871
* Desc::                        @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
3872
@end ifset
3873
@ifset COFF
3874
* Dim::                         @code{.dim}
3875
@end ifset
3876
 
3877
* Double::                      @code{.double @var{flonums}}
3878
* Eject::                       @code{.eject}
3879
* Else::                        @code{.else}
3880
* Elseif::                      @code{.elseif}
3881
* End::                         @code{.end}
3882
@ifset COFF
3883
* Endef::                       @code{.endef}
3884
@end ifset
3885
 
3886
* Endfunc::                     @code{.endfunc}
3887
* Endif::                       @code{.endif}
3888
* Equ::                         @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3889
* Equiv::                       @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3890
* Eqv::                         @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3891
* Err::                         @code{.err}
3892
* Error::                       @code{.error @var{string}}
3893
* Exitm::                       @code{.exitm}
3894
* Extern::                      @code{.extern}
3895
* Fail::                        @code{.fail}
3896
* File::                        @code{.file}
3897
* Fill::                        @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
3898
* Float::                       @code{.float @var{flonums}}
3899
* Func::                        @code{.func}
3900
* Global::                      @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
3901
@ifset ELF
3902
* Gnu_attribute::               @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
3903
* Hidden::                      @code{.hidden @var{names}}
3904
@end ifset
3905
 
3906
* hword::                       @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
3907
* Ident::                       @code{.ident}
3908
* If::                          @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
3909
* Incbin::                      @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
3910
* Include::                     @code{.include "@var{file}"}
3911
* Int::                         @code{.int @var{expressions}}
3912
@ifset ELF
3913
* Internal::                    @code{.internal @var{names}}
3914
@end ifset
3915
 
3916
* Irp::                         @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3917
* Irpc::                        @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
3918
* Lcomm::                       @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
3919
* Lflags::                      @code{.lflags}
3920
@ifclear no-line-dir
3921
* Line::                        @code{.line @var{line-number}}
3922
@end ifclear
3923
 
3924
* Linkonce::                    @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
3925
* List::                        @code{.list}
3926
* Ln::                          @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
3927
* Loc::                         @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
3928
* Loc_mark_labels::             @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
3929
@ifset ELF
3930
* Local::                       @code{.local @var{names}}
3931
@end ifset
3932
 
3933
* Long::                        @code{.long @var{expressions}}
3934
@ignore
3935
* Lsym::                        @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3936
@end ignore
3937
 
3938
* Macro::                       @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
3939
* MRI::                         @code{.mri @var{val}}
3940
* Noaltmacro::                  @code{.noaltmacro}
3941
* Nolist::                      @code{.nolist}
3942
* Octa::                        @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
3943
* Org::                         @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
3944
* P2align::                     @code{.p2align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
3945
@ifset ELF
3946
* PopSection::                  @code{.popsection}
3947
* Previous::                    @code{.previous}
3948
@end ifset
3949
 
3950
* Print::                       @code{.print @var{string}}
3951
@ifset ELF
3952
* Protected::                   @code{.protected @var{names}}
3953
@end ifset
3954
 
3955
* Psize::                       @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
3956
* Purgem::                      @code{.purgem @var{name}}
3957
@ifset ELF
3958
* PushSection::                 @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
3959
@end ifset
3960
 
3961
* Quad::                        @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
3962
* Reloc::                       @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
3963
* Rept::                        @code{.rept @var{count}}
3964
* Sbttl::                       @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
3965
@ifset COFF
3966
* Scl::                         @code{.scl @var{class}}
3967
@end ifset
3968
@ifset COFF-ELF
3969
* Section::                     @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
3970
@end ifset
3971
 
3972
* Set::                         @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
3973
* Short::                       @code{.short @var{expressions}}
3974
* Single::                      @code{.single @var{flonums}}
3975
@ifset COFF-ELF
3976
* Size::                        @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
3977
@end ifset
3978
@ifclear no-space-dir
3979
* Skip::                        @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
3980
@end ifclear
3981
 
3982
* Sleb128::                     @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
3983
@ifclear no-space-dir
3984
* Space::                       @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
3985
@end ifclear
3986
@ifset have-stabs
3987
* Stab::                        @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
3988
@end ifset
3989
 
3990
* String::                      @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
3991
* Struct::                      @code{.struct @var{expression}}
3992
@ifset ELF
3993
* SubSection::                  @code{.subsection}
3994
* Symver::                      @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}}
3995
@end ifset
3996
 
3997
@ifset COFF
3998
* Tag::                         @code{.tag @var{structname}}
3999
@end ifset
4000
 
4001
* Text::                        @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4002
* Title::                       @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4003
@ifset COFF-ELF
4004
* Type::                        @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4005
@end ifset
4006
 
4007
* Uleb128::                     @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4008
@ifset COFF
4009
* Val::                         @code{.val @var{addr}}
4010
@end ifset
4011
 
4012
@ifset ELF
4013
* Version::                     @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4014
* VTableEntry::                 @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4015
* VTableInherit::               @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4016
@end ifset
4017
 
4018
* Warning::                     @code{.warning @var{string}}
4019
* Weak::                        @code{.weak @var{names}}
4020
* Weakref::                     @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4021
* Word::                        @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4022
* Deprecated::                  Deprecated Directives
4023
@end menu
4024
 
4025
@node Abort
4026
@section @code{.abort}
4027
 
4028
@cindex @code{abort} directive
4029
@cindex stopping the assembly
4030
This directive stops the assembly immediately.  It is for
4031
compatibility with other assemblers.  The original idea was that the
4032
assembly language source would be piped into the assembler.  If the sender
4033
of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4034
quit also.  One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4035
 
4036
@ifset COFF
4037
@node ABORT (COFF)
4038
@section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4039
 
4040
@cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4041
When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4042
synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4043
 
4044
@ifset BOUT
4045
When producing @code{b.out} output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive,
4046
but ignores it.
4047
@end ifset
4048
@end ifset
4049
 
4050
@node Align
4051
@section @code{.align @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4052
 
4053
@cindex padding the location counter
4054
@cindex @code{align} directive
4055
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4056
boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4057
required, as described below.
4058
 
4059
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4060
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4061
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4062
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4063
with no-op instructions.
4064
 
4065
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4066
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4067
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4068
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4069
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4070
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4071
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4072
 
4073
The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4074
For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, i860, iq2000, m68k, or32,
4075
s390, sparc, tic4x, tic80 and xtensa, the first expression is the
4076
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4077
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4078
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.  For the tic54x, the
4079
first expression is the alignment request in words.
4080
 
4081
For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4082
strongarm, it is the
4083
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4084
advancement.  For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4085
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
4086
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4087
 
4088
This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4089
native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4090
GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4091
described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4092
architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4093
 
4094
@node Altmacro
4095
@section @code{.altmacro}
4096
Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4097
 
4098
@ftable @code
4099
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4100
One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available.  It is used to
4101
generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4102
replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion.  The
4103
replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4104
separate macro expansion.  @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4105
define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4106
 
4107
@item String delimiters
4108
You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4109
@code{"@var{string}"}:
4110
 
4111
@table @code
4112
@item '@var{string}'
4113
You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4114
 
4115
@item <@var{string}>
4116
You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4117
@end table
4118
 
4119
@item single-character string escape
4120
To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4121
character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4122
character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark).  For example, you can
4123
write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4124
 
4125
@item Expression results as strings
4126
You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4127
and use the result as a string.
4128
@end ftable
4129
 
4130
@node Ascii
4131
@section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4132
 
4133
@cindex @code{ascii} directive
4134
@cindex string literals
4135
@code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4136
separated by commas.  It assembles each string (with no automatic
4137
trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4138
 
4139
@node Asciz
4140
@section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4141
 
4142
@cindex @code{asciz} directive
4143
@cindex zero-terminated strings
4144
@cindex null-terminated strings
4145
@code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4146
a zero byte.  The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4147
 
4148
@node Balign
4149
@section @code{.balign[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
4150
 
4151
@cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4152
@cindex @code{balign} directive
4153
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4154
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4155
alignment request in bytes.  For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4156
the location counter until it is a multiple of 8.  If the location counter
4157
is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4158
 
4159
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4160
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
4161
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
4162
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4163
with no-op instructions.
4164
 
4165
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
4166
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4167
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4168
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
4169
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4170
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4171
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4172
 
4173
@cindex @code{balignw} directive
4174
@cindex @code{balignl} directive
4175
The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4176
@code{.balign} directive.  The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4177
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4178
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.balignw
4179
4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
4180
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4181
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4182
undefined.
4183
 
4184
@node Byte
4185
@section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4186
 
4187
@cindex @code{byte} directive
4188
@cindex integers, one byte
4189
@code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4190
Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4191
 
4192
@node CFI directives
4193
@section @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4194
@cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4195
@code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4196
should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4197
data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4198
@code{.cfi_endproc}.
4199
 
4200
@section @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4201
@cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4202
@code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4203
should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4204
If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4205
if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4206
To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}.  The default if this
4207
directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4208
 
4209
Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4210
it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4211
 
4212
@section @code{.cfi_endproc}
4213
@cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4214
@code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4215
unwind entry previously opened by
4216
@code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4217
 
4218
@section @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4219
@code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4220
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4221
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4222
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4223
a constant or a symbol name.  When using indirect encodings,
4224
the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4225
can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4226
The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4227
no personality routine.
4228
 
4229
@section @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4230
@code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4231
@var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4232
should be encoded.  If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4233
argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be a constant
4234
or a symbol name.  The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4235
no LSDA.
4236
 
4237
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4238
@code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4239
address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4240
 
4241
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4242
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4243
now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4244
remains the same.
4245
 
4246
@section @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4247
@code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4248
remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4249
absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4250
CFA address.
4251
 
4252
@section @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4253
Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4254
value that is added/substracted from the previous offset.
4255
 
4256
@section @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4257
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4258
CFA.
4259
 
4260
@section @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4261
Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4262
the current CFA register.  This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4263
using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4264
This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4265
code it's annotating.
4266
 
4267
@section @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4268
Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4269
 
4270
@section @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4271
@code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4272
same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4273
instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4274
 
4275
@section @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4276
From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4277
 
4278
@section @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4279
Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4280
i.e. no restoration needed.
4281
 
4282
@section @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4283
First save all current rules for all registers by @code{.cfi_remember_state},
4284
then totally screw them up by subsequent @code{.cfi_*} directives and when
4285
everything is hopelessly bad, use @code{.cfi_restore_state} to restore
4286
the previous saved state.
4287
 
4288
@section @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4289
Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4290
directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4291
 
4292
@section @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4293
Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4294
 
4295
@section @code{.cfi_window_save}
4296
SPARC register window has been saved.
4297
 
4298
@section @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4299
Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info.  One
4300
might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4301
opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4302
 
4303
@section @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4304
The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}.  The value of @var{label}
4305
will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4306
description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4307
 
4308
The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4309
limited to the return address register.  Here, it can be useful to
4310
mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4311
by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4312
or another register.
4313
 
4314
@node Comm
4315
@section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4316
 
4317
@cindex @code{comm} directive
4318
@cindex symbol, common
4319
@code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}.  When linking, a
4320
common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4321
of the same name in another object file.  If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4322
definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4323
allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory.  @var{length} must be an
4324
absolute expression.  If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
4325
the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
4326
using the largest size.
4327
 
4328
@ifset COFF-ELF
4329
When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
4330
an optional third argument.  This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
4331
specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
4332
that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
4333
as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
4334
boundary).  The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
4335
power of two.  If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
4336
common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol.  If no
4337
alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
4338
largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
4339
maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
4340
is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
4341
@samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
4342
multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
4343
It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
4344
(@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
4345
@end ifset
4346
 
4347
@ifset HPPA
4348
The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4349
@samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4350
@end ifset
4351
 
4352
@node Data
4353
@section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4354
 
4355
@cindex @code{data} directive
4356
@code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
4357
end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
4358
absolute expression).  If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
4359
to zero.
4360
 
4361
@ifset COFF
4362
@node Def
4363
@section @code{.def @var{name}}
4364
 
4365
@cindex @code{def} directive
4366
@cindex COFF symbols, debugging
4367
@cindex debugging COFF symbols
4368
Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
4369
definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
4370
@ifset BOUT
4371
 
4372
This directive is only observed when @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF
4373
format output; when producing @code{b.out}, @samp{.def} is recognized,
4374
but ignored.
4375
@end ifset
4376
@end ifset
4377
 
4378
@ifset aout-bout
4379
@node Desc
4380
@section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4381
 
4382
@cindex @code{desc} directive
4383
@cindex COFF symbol descriptor
4384
@cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
4385
This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
4386
to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
4387
 
4388
@ifset COFF
4389
The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
4390
configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
4391
object format.  For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
4392
it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
4393
@end ifset
4394
@end ifset
4395
 
4396
@ifset COFF
4397
@node Dim
4398
@section @code{.dim}
4399
 
4400
@cindex @code{dim} directive
4401
@cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
4402
@cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
4403
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
4404
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
4405
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
4406
@ifset BOUT
4407
 
4408
@samp{.dim} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
4409
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
4410
ignores it.
4411
@end ifset
4412
@end ifset
4413
 
4414
@node Double
4415
@section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4416
 
4417
@cindex @code{double} directive
4418
@cindex floating point numbers (double)
4419
@code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4420
assembles floating point numbers.
4421
@ifset GENERIC
4422
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4423
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4424
@end ifset
4425
@ifclear GENERIC
4426
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4427
On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
4428
in @sc{ieee} format.
4429
@end ifset
4430
@end ifclear
4431
 
4432
@node Eject
4433
@section @code{.eject}
4434
 
4435
@cindex @code{eject} directive
4436
@cindex new page, in listings
4437
@cindex page, in listings
4438
@cindex listing control: new page
4439
Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
4440
 
4441
@node Else
4442
@section @code{.else}
4443
 
4444
@cindex @code{else} directive
4445
@code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4446
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It marks the beginning of a section
4447
of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
4448
was false.
4449
 
4450
@node Elseif
4451
@section @code{.elseif}
4452
 
4453
@cindex @code{elseif} directive
4454
@code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
4455
assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}.  It is shorthand for beginning a new
4456
@code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
4457
 
4458
@node End
4459
@section @code{.end}
4460
 
4461
@cindex @code{end} directive
4462
@code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file.  @command{@value{AS}} does not
4463
process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
4464
 
4465
@ifset COFF
4466
@node Endef
4467
@section @code{.endef}
4468
 
4469
@cindex @code{endef} directive
4470
This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
4471
@code{.def}.
4472
@ifset BOUT
4473
 
4474
@samp{.endef} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; if
4475
@command{@value{AS}} is configured to generate @code{b.out}, it accepts this
4476
directive but ignores it.
4477
@end ifset
4478
@end ifset
4479
 
4480
@node Endfunc
4481
@section @code{.endfunc}
4482
@cindex @code{endfunc} directive
4483
@code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
4484
 
4485
@node Endif
4486
@section @code{.endif}
4487
 
4488
@cindex @code{endif} directive
4489
@code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
4490
it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
4491
conditionally.  @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
4492
 
4493
@node Equ
4494
@section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4495
 
4496
@cindex @code{equ} directive
4497
@cindex assigning values to symbols
4498
@cindex symbols, assigning values to
4499
This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
4500
It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
4501
 
4502
@ifset HPPA
4503
The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
4504
@samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
4505
@end ifset
4506
 
4507
@ifset Z80
4508
The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
4509
@samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
4510
On the Z80 it is an eror if @var{symbol} is already defined,
4511
but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
4512
Compare @ref{Equiv}.
4513
@end ifset
4514
 
4515
@node Equiv
4516
@section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4517
@cindex @code{equiv} directive
4518
The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
4519
the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined.  Note a
4520
symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
4521
undefined.
4522
 
4523
Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
4524
@smallexample
4525
.ifdef SYM
4526
.err
4527
.endif
4528
.equ SYM,VAL
4529
@end smallexample
4530
plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
4531
 
4532
@node Eqv
4533
@section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4534
@cindex @code{eqv} directive
4535
The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
4536
evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately.  Instead each time
4537
the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
4538
value is taken.
4539
 
4540
@node Err
4541
@section @code{.err}
4542
@cindex @code{err} directive
4543
If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
4544
message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
4545
object file.  This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
4546
 
4547
@node Error
4548
@section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
4549
@cindex error directive
4550
 
4551
Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
4552
string that will be emitted as the error message.  If you don't specify the
4553
message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
4554
@xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
4555
 
4556
@smallexample
4557
 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
4558
@end smallexample
4559
 
4560
@node Exitm
4561
@section @code{.exitm}
4562
Exit early from the current macro definition.  @xref{Macro}.
4563
 
4564
@node Extern
4565
@section @code{.extern}
4566
 
4567
@cindex @code{extern} directive
4568
@code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
4569
with other assemblers---but it is ignored.  @command{@value{AS}} treats
4570
all undefined symbols as external.
4571
 
4572
@node Fail
4573
@section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
4574
 
4575
@cindex @code{fail} directive
4576
Generates an error or a warning.  If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
4577
or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message.  If the value is less
4578
than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message.  The message will
4579
include the value of @var{expression}.  This can occasionally be useful inside
4580
complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
4581
 
4582
@node File
4583
@section @code{.file}
4584
@cindex @code{file} directive
4585
 
4586
@ifclear no-file-dir
4587
There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive.  Targets
4588
that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
4589
@code{.file}.  Other targets use the default version.
4590
 
4591
@subheading Default Version
4592
 
4593
@cindex logical file name
4594
@cindex file name, logical
4595
This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
4596
are about to start a new logical file.  The syntax is:
4597
 
4598
@smallexample
4599
.file @var{string}
4600
@end smallexample
4601
 
4602
@var{string} is the new file name.  In general, the filename is
4603
recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
4604
to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}.  This
4605
statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
4606
old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
4607
 
4608
@subheading DWARF2 Version
4609
@end ifclear
4610
 
4611
When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
4612
to the @code{.debug_line} file name table.  The syntax is:
4613
 
4614
@smallexample
4615
.file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
4616
@end smallexample
4617
 
4618
The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
4619
index of the entry in the table.  The @var{filename} operand is a C string
4620
literal.
4621
 
4622
The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
4623
table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
4624
information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
4625
entries will have.
4626
 
4627
@node Fill
4628
@section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4629
 
4630
@cindex @code{fill} directive
4631
@cindex writing patterns in memory
4632
@cindex patterns, writing in memory
4633
@var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
4634
This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes.  @var{Repeat}
4635
may be zero or more.  @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
4636
more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
4637
other people's assemblers.  The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
4638
is taken from an 8-byte number.  The highest order 4 bytes are
4639
zero.  The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
4640
byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
4641
Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
4642
@var{size} bytes of this number.  Again, this bizarre behavior is
4643
compatible with other people's assemblers.
4644
 
4645
@var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
4646
If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
4647
assumed zero.  If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
4648
@var{size} is assumed to be 1.
4649
 
4650
@node Float
4651
@section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4652
 
4653
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
4654
@cindex @code{float} directive
4655
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
4656
has the same effect as @code{.single}.
4657
@ifset GENERIC
4658
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
4659
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.
4660
@xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4661
@end ifset
4662
@ifclear GENERIC
4663
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
4664
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
4665
in @sc{ieee} format.
4666
@end ifset
4667
@end ifclear
4668
 
4669
@node Func
4670
@section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
4671
@cindex @code{func} directive
4672
@code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
4673
is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
4674
Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
4675
@var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
4676
prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
4677
@samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
4678
All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
4679
The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
4680
 
4681
@node Global
4682
@section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4683
 
4684
@cindex @code{global} directive
4685
@cindex symbol, making visible to linker
4686
@code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}.  If you define
4687
@var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
4688
other partial programs that are linked with it.  Otherwise,
4689
@var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
4690
from another file linked into the same program.
4691
 
4692
Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
4693
compatibility with other assemblers.
4694
 
4695
@ifset HPPA
4696
On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
4697
partial programs.  You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
4698
@xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
4699
@end ifset
4700
 
4701
@ifset ELF
4702
@node Gnu_attribute
4703
@section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4704
Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file.  @xref{Object Attributes}.
4705
 
4706
@node Hidden
4707
@section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4708
 
4709
@cindex @code{hidden} directive
4710
@cindex visibility
4711
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4712
@code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
4713
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4714
 
4715
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4716
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4717
@code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
4718
Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
4719
@end ifset
4720
 
4721
@node hword
4722
@section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4723
 
4724
@cindex @code{hword} directive
4725
@cindex integers, 16-bit
4726
@cindex numbers, 16-bit
4727
@cindex sixteen bit integers
4728
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
4729
a 16 bit number for each.
4730
 
4731
@ifset GENERIC
4732
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
4733
architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
4734
@end ifset
4735
@ifclear GENERIC
4736
@ifset W32
4737
This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
4738
@end ifset
4739
@ifset W16
4740
This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
4741
@end ifset
4742
@end ifclear
4743
 
4744
@node Ident
4745
@section @code{.ident}
4746
 
4747
@cindex @code{ident} directive
4748
 
4749
This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files.  The
4750
behavior of this directive varies depending on the target.  When using the
4751
a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
4752
source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
4753
for it.  When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
4754
@code{.rdata} section, depending on the target.  When using ELF, comments are
4755
emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
4756
 
4757
@node If
4758
@section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4759
 
4760
@cindex conditional assembly
4761
@cindex @code{if} directive
4762
@code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
4763
considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
4764
(which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero.  The end of
4765
the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
4766
(@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
4767
alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
4768
If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
4769
nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
4770
 
4771
The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
4772
@table @code
4773
@cindex @code{ifdef} directive
4774
@item .ifdef @var{symbol}
4775
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4776
has been defined.  Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
4777
is considered to be undefined.
4778
 
4779
@cindex @code{ifb} directive
4780
@item .ifb @var{text}
4781
Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
4782
 
4783
@cindex @code{ifc} directive
4784
@item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
4785
Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same.  The
4786
strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes.  If they are not quoted,
4787
the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
4788
end of the line.  Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted.  The
4789
string comparison is case sensitive.
4790
 
4791
@cindex @code{ifeq} directive
4792
@item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
4793
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
4794
 
4795
@cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
4796
@item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
4797
Another form of @code{.ifc}.  The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
4798
 
4799
@cindex @code{ifge} directive
4800
@item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
4801
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
4802
equal to zero.
4803
 
4804
@cindex @code{ifgt} directive
4805
@item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
4806
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
4807
 
4808
@cindex @code{ifle} directive
4809
@item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
4810
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
4811
to zero.
4812
 
4813
@cindex @code{iflt} directive
4814
@item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
4815
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
4816
 
4817
@cindex @code{ifnb} directive
4818
@item .ifnb @var{text}
4819
Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4820
following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
4821
 
4822
@cindex @code{ifnc} directive
4823
@item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
4824
Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4825
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4826
 
4827
@cindex @code{ifndef} directive
4828
@cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
4829
@item .ifndef @var{symbol}
4830
@itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
4831
Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
4832
has not been defined.  Both spelling variants are equivalent.  Note a symbol
4833
which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
4834
 
4835
@cindex @code{ifne} directive
4836
@item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
4837
Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
4838
(in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
4839
 
4840
@cindex @code{ifnes} directive
4841
@item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
4842
Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
4843
following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
4844
@end table
4845
 
4846
@node Incbin
4847
@section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4848
 
4849
@cindex @code{incbin} directive
4850
@cindex binary files, including
4851
The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
4852
location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
4853
option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4854
around @var{file}.
4855
 
4856
The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
4857
@var{file}.  The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
4858
read.  Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
4859
responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
4860
after the @code{incbin} directive.
4861
 
4862
@node Include
4863
@section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4864
 
4865
@cindex @code{include} directive
4866
@cindex supporting files, including
4867
@cindex files, including
4868
This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
4869
points in your source program.  The code from @var{file} is assembled as
4870
if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
4871
included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues.  You
4872
can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
4873
(@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}).  Quotation marks are required
4874
around @var{file}.
4875
 
4876
@node Int
4877
@section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4878
 
4879
@cindex @code{int} directive
4880
@cindex integers, 32-bit
4881
Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
4882
For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
4883
expression.  The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
4884
of target the assembly is for.
4885
 
4886
@ifclear GENERIC
4887
@ifset H8
4888
On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
4889
integers.  On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
4890
32-bit integers.
4891
@end ifset
4892
@end ifclear
4893
 
4894
@ifset ELF
4895
@node Internal
4896
@section @code{.internal @var{names}}
4897
 
4898
@cindex @code{internal} directive
4899
@cindex visibility
4900
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
4901
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
4902
@code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
4903
 
4904
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
4905
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
4906
@code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
4907
(i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
4908
processing must also be performed upon the  symbols as well.
4909
@end ifset
4910
 
4911
@node Irp
4912
@section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4913
 
4914
@cindex @code{irp} directive
4915
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
4916
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
4917
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
4918
set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled.  If no
4919
@var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
4920
@var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to @var{symbol} within the
4921
sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
4922
 
4923
For example, assembling
4924
 
4925
@example
4926
        .irp    param,1,2,3
4927
        move    d\param,sp@@-
4928
        .endr
4929
@end example
4930
 
4931
is equivalent to assembling
4932
 
4933
@example
4934
        move    d1,sp@@-
4935
        move    d2,sp@@-
4936
        move    d3,sp@@-
4937
@end example
4938
 
4939
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
4940
 
4941
@node Irpc
4942
@section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4943
 
4944
@cindex @code{irpc} directive
4945
Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
4946
The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
4947
terminated by an @code{.endr} directive.  For each character in @var{value},
4948
@var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
4949
assembled.  If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
4950
assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string.  To refer to
4951
@var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
4952
 
4953
For example, assembling
4954
 
4955
@example
4956
        .irpc    param,123
4957
        move    d\param,sp@@-
4958
        .endr
4959
@end example
4960
 
4961
is equivalent to assembling
4962
 
4963
@example
4964
        move    d1,sp@@-
4965
        move    d2,sp@@-
4966
        move    d3,sp@@-
4967
@end example
4968
 
4969
For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
4970
at @xref{Macro}.
4971
 
4972
@node Lcomm
4973
@section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4974
 
4975
@cindex @code{lcomm} directive
4976
@cindex local common symbols
4977
@cindex symbols, local common
4978
Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
4979
denoted by @var{symbol}.  The section and value of @var{symbol} are
4980
those of the new local common.  The addresses are allocated in the bss
4981
section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed.  @var{Symbol}
4982
is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
4983
not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
4984
 
4985
@ifset GENERIC
4986
Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}.  This
4987
argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
4988
@end ifset
4989
 
4990
@ifset HPPA
4991
The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA.  The syntax is
4992
@samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
4993
@end ifset
4994
 
4995
@node Lflags
4996
@section @code{.lflags}
4997
 
4998
@cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
4999
@command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5000
assemblers, but ignores it.
5001
 
5002
@ifclear no-line-dir
5003
@node Line
5004
@section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5005
 
5006
@cindex @code{line} directive
5007
@cindex logical line number
5008
@ifset aout-bout
5009
Change the logical line number.  @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5010
expression.  The next line has that logical line number.  Therefore any other
5011
statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5012
reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.  One day
5013
@command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5014
for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5015
@end ifset
5016
 
5017
Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5018
@code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5019
when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5020
were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5021
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5022
 
5023
Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5024
used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5025
debugging.
5026
@end ifclear
5027
 
5028
@node Linkonce
5029
@section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5030
@cindex COMDAT
5031
@cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5032
@cindex common sections
5033
Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5034
This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5035
but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5036
The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5037
Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5038
unique.
5039
 
5040
This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5041
writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5042
Executable format used on Windows NT.
5043
 
5044
The @var{type} argument is optional.  If specified, it must be one of the
5045
following strings.  For example:
5046
@smallexample
5047
.linkonce same_size
5048
@end smallexample
5049
Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5050
 
5051
@table @code
5052
@item discard
5053
Silently discard duplicate sections.  This is the default.
5054
 
5055
@item one_only
5056
Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5057
 
5058
@item same_size
5059
Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5060
 
5061
@item same_contents
5062
Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5063
@end table
5064
 
5065
@node List
5066
@section @code{.list}
5067
 
5068
@cindex @code{list} directive
5069
@cindex listing control, turning on
5070
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5071
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5072
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5073
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5074
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5075
 
5076
By default, listings are disabled.  When you enable them (with the
5077
@samp{-a} command line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5078
the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5079
 
5080
@node Ln
5081
@section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5082
 
5083
@cindex @code{ln} directive
5084
@ifclear no-line-dir
5085
@samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5086
@end ifclear
5087
@ifset no-line-dir
5088
Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number.  @var{line-number}
5089
must be an absolute expression.  The next line has that logical
5090
line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5091
statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5092
line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5093
@ifset BOUT
5094
 
5095
This directive is accepted, but ignored, when @command{@value{AS}} is
5096
configured for @code{b.out}; its effect is only associated with COFF
5097
output format.
5098
@end ifset
5099
@end ifset
5100
 
5101
@node Loc
5102
@section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5103
@cindex @code{loc} directive
5104
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5105
the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5106
number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5107
instruction.  The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5108
arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5109
the row is added.
5110
 
5111
The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5112
 
5113
@table @code
5114
@item basic_block
5115
This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5116
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5117
 
5118
@item prologue_end
5119
This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5120
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5121
 
5122
@item epilogue_begin
5123
This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5124
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5125
 
5126
@item is_stmt @var{value}
5127
This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5128
@code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5129
either 0 or 1.
5130
 
5131
@item isa @var{value}
5132
This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5133
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5134
 
5135
@item discriminator @var{value}
5136
This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5137
state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5138
 
5139
@end table
5140
 
5141
@node Loc_mark_labels
5142
@section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5143
@cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5144
When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5145
the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5146
to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5147
register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5148
The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5149
this function respectively.
5150
 
5151
@ifset ELF
5152
@node Local
5153
@section @code{.local @var{names}}
5154
 
5155
@cindex @code{local} directive
5156
This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5157
the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5158
will not be externally visible.  If the symbols do not already exist,
5159
they will be created.
5160
 
5161
For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5162
accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5163
the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5164
(@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5165
@end ifset
5166
 
5167
@node Long
5168
@section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5169
 
5170
@cindex @code{long} directive
5171
@code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}.  @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5172
 
5173
@ignore
5174
@c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5175
@c what it really ought to do
5176
@node Lsym
5177
@section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5178
 
5179
@cindex @code{lsym} directive
5180
@cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5181
@code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5182
the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5183
rest of the assembly.  This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5184
the same as the expression value:
5185
@smallexample
5186
@var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5187
@var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5188
@var{value} = @var{expression}
5189
@end smallexample
5190
@noindent
5191
The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5192
@end ignore
5193
 
5194
@node Macro
5195
@section @code{.macro}
5196
 
5197
@cindex macros
5198
The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5199
generate assembly output.  For example, this definition specifies a macro
5200
@code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5201
 
5202
@example
5203
        .macro  sum from=0, to=5
5204
        .long   \from
5205
        .if     \to-\from
5206
        sum     "(\from+1)",\to
5207
        .endif
5208
        .endm
5209
@end example
5210
 
5211
@noindent
5212
With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5213
 
5214
@example
5215
        .long   0
5216
        .long   1
5217
        .long   2
5218
        .long   3
5219
        .long   4
5220
        .long   5
5221
@end example
5222
 
5223
@ftable @code
5224
@item .macro @var{macname}
5225
@itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
5226
@cindex @code{macro} directive
5227
Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}.  If your macro
5228
definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
5229
separated by commas or spaces.  You can qualify the macro argument to
5230
indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
5231
@samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
5232
(through @samp{:@code{vararg}}).  You can supply a default value for any
5233
macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}.  You
5234
cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
5235
subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
5236
definitions.  For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
5237
 
5238
@table @code
5239
@item .macro comm
5240
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
5241
arguments.
5242
 
5243
@item  .macro plus1 p, p1
5244
@itemx .macro plus1 p p1
5245
Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
5246
which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
5247
@samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
5248
 
5249
@item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
5250
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
5251
arguments.  The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
5252
After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
5253
@samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
5254
@var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
5255
,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
5256
@samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
5257
 
5258
@item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
5259
Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
5260
arguments.  The first argument must always have a value specified, but
5261
not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
5262
will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
5263
 
5264
When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
5265
position, or by keyword.  For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
5266
@samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
5267
 
5268
@end table
5269
 
5270
Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
5271
as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
5272
occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
5273
characters when they occur in a special position.  For example, if the colon
5274
(@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
5275
architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
5276
character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
5277
replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
5278
construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
5279
identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution.  So for example
5280
this macro definition:
5281
 
5282
@example
5283
        .macro label l
5284
\l:
5285
        .endm
5286
@end example
5287
 
5288
might not work as expected.  Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
5289
called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
5290
assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
5291
identifier.
5292
 
5293
Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
5294
which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names).  So
5295
for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
5296
length specifier like this:
5297
 
5298
@example
5299
        .macro opcode base length
5300
        \base.\length
5301
        .endm
5302
@end example
5303
 
5304
and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
5305
instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
5306
interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
5307
 
5308
There are several possible ways around this problem:
5309
 
5310
@table @code
5311
@item Insert white space
5312
If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
5313
solution.  eg:
5314
 
5315
@example
5316
        .macro label l
5317
\l :
5318
        .endm
5319
@end example
5320
 
5321
@item Use @samp{\()}
5322
The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
5323
the following text.  eg:
5324
 
5325
@example
5326
        .macro opcode base length
5327
        \base\().\length
5328
        .endm
5329
@end example
5330
 
5331
@item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
5332
In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
5333
used as a separator.  eg:
5334
 
5335
@example
5336
        .altmacro
5337
        .macro label l
5338
l&:
5339
        .endm
5340
@end example
5341
@end table
5342
 
5343
Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
5344
also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
5345
and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
5346
 
5347
@item .endm
5348
@cindex @code{endm} directive
5349
Mark the end of a macro definition.
5350
 
5351
@item .exitm
5352
@cindex @code{exitm} directive
5353
Exit early from the current macro definition.
5354
 
5355
@cindex number of macros executed
5356
@cindex macros, count executed
5357
@item \@@
5358
@command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
5359
executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
5360
output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
5361
 
5362
@item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
5363
@emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
5364
macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
5365
@xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
5366
@end ftable
5367
 
5368
@node MRI
5369
@section @code{.mri @var{val}}
5370
 
5371
@cindex @code{mri} directive
5372
@cindex MRI mode, temporarily
5373
If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode.  If
5374
@var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode.  This change
5375
affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
5376
of the file.  @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
5377
 
5378
@node Noaltmacro
5379
@section @code{.noaltmacro}
5380
Disable alternate macro mode.  @xref{Altmacro}.
5381
 
5382
@node Nolist
5383
@section @code{.nolist}
5384
 
5385
@cindex @code{nolist} directive
5386
@cindex listing control, turning off
5387
Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
5388
not assembly listings are generated.  These two directives maintain an
5389
internal counter (which is zero initially).   @code{.list} increments the
5390
counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it.  Assembly listings are
5391
generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5392
 
5393
@node Octa
5394
@section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
5395
 
5396
@c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on i960, others?  Or warn?
5397
@cindex @code{octa} directive
5398
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5399
@cindex sixteen byte integer
5400
This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For each
5401
bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
5402
 
5403
The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5404
hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
5405
 
5406
@node Org
5407
@section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
5408
 
5409
@cindex @code{org} directive
5410
@cindex location counter, advancing
5411
@cindex advancing location counter
5412
@cindex current address, advancing
5413
Advance the location counter of the current section to
5414
@var{new-lc}.  @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
5415
expression with the same section as the current subsection.  That is,
5416
you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
5417
wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored.  To be compatible
5418
with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
5419
@command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
5420
is the same as the current subsection.
5421
 
5422
@code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
5423
unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
5424
backwards.
5425
 
5426
@c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
5427
@c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
5428
@c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
5429
Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
5430
may not be undefined.  If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
5431
a chance to share your improved assembler.
5432
 
5433
Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
5434
to the start of the subsection.  This is compatible with other
5435
people's assemblers.
5436
 
5437
When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
5438
intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
5439
absolute expression.  If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
5440
@var{fill} defaults to zero.
5441
 
5442
@node P2align
5443
@section @code{.p2align[wl] @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}, @var{abs-expr}}
5444
 
5445
@cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
5446
@cindex @code{p2align} directive
5447
Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
5448
storage boundary.  The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
5449
number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
5450
advancement.  For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
5451
counter until it a multiple of 8.  If the location counter is already a
5452
multiple of 8, no change is needed.
5453
 
5454
The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
5455
padding bytes.  It (and the comma) may be omitted.  If it is omitted, the
5456
padding bytes are normally zero.  However, on some systems, if the section is
5457
marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
5458
with no-op instructions.
5459
 
5460
The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional.  If it is present,
5461
it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
5462
directive.  If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
5463
specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all.  You can omit the
5464
fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
5465
required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
5466
with no-op instructions when appropriate.
5467
 
5468
@cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
5469
@cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
5470
The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
5471
@code{.p2align} directive.  The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
5472
pattern as a two byte word value.  The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
5473
fill pattern as a four byte longword value.  For example, @code{.p2alignw
5474
2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4.  If it skips two bytes, they will be
5475
filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
5476
the endianness of the processor).  If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
5477
undefined.
5478
 
5479
@ifset ELF
5480
@node PopSection
5481
@section @code{.popsection}
5482
 
5483
@cindex @code{popsection} directive
5484
@cindex Section Stack
5485
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5486
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5487
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
5488
(@pxref{Previous}).
5489
 
5490
This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
5491
section (and subsection) on the section stack.  This section is popped off the
5492
stack.
5493
@end ifset
5494
 
5495
@ifset ELF
5496
@node Previous
5497
@section @code{.previous}
5498
 
5499
@cindex @code{previous} directive
5500
@cindex Section Stack
5501
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5502
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5503
@code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
5504
(@pxref{PopSection}).
5505
 
5506
This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
5507
referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one.  Multiple
5508
@code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
5509
subsections).  For example:
5510
 
5511
@smallexample
5512
.section A
5513
 .subsection 1
5514
  .word 0x1234
5515
 .subsection 2
5516
  .word 0x5678
5517
.previous
5518
 .word 0x9abc
5519
@end smallexample
5520
 
5521
Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
5522
section A.  Whilst:
5523
 
5524
@smallexample
5525
.section A
5526
.subsection 1
5527
  # Now in section A subsection 1
5528
  .word 0x1234
5529
.section B
5530
.subsection 0
5531
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5532
  .word 0x5678
5533
.subsection 1
5534
  # Now in section B subsection 1
5535
  .word 0x9abc
5536
.previous
5537
  # Now in section B subsection 0
5538
  .word 0xdef0
5539
@end smallexample
5540
 
5541
Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
5542
section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
5543
 
5544
In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
5545
the top section on the section stack.
5546
@end ifset
5547
 
5548
@node Print
5549
@section @code{.print @var{string}}
5550
 
5551
@cindex @code{print} directive
5552
@command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
5553
assembly.  You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
5554
 
5555
@ifset ELF
5556
@node Protected
5557
@section @code{.protected @var{names}}
5558
 
5559
@cindex @code{protected} directive
5560
@cindex visibility
5561
This is one of the ELF visibility directives.  The other two are
5562
@code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
5563
 
5564
This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5565
their binding: local, global or weak).  The directive sets the visibility to
5566
@code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
5567
components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
5568
component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
5569
this.
5570
@end ifset
5571
 
5572
@node Psize
5573
@section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
5574
 
5575
@cindex @code{psize} directive
5576
@cindex listing control: paper size
5577
@cindex paper size, for listings
5578
Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
5579
number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
5580
 
5581
If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
5582
of 60.  You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
5583
default width is 200 columns.
5584
 
5585
@command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
5586
lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
5587
@code{.eject}).
5588
 
5589
If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
5590
those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
5591
 
5592
@node Purgem
5593
@section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
5594
 
5595
@cindex @code{purgem} directive
5596
Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
5597
expanded.  @xref{Macro}.
5598
 
5599
@ifset ELF
5600
@node PushSection
5601
@section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
5602
 
5603
@cindex @code{pushsection} directive
5604
@cindex Section Stack
5605
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5606
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
5607
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
5608
(@pxref{Previous}).
5609
 
5610
This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
5611
top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
5612
subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
5613
@code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
5614
as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
5615
@end ifset
5616
 
5617
@node Quad
5618
@section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
5619
 
5620
@cindex @code{quad} directive
5621
@code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas.  For
5622
each bignum, it emits
5623
@ifclear bignum-16
5624
an 8-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
5625
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
5626
@cindex eight-byte integer
5627
@cindex integer, 8-byte
5628
 
5629
The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
5630
hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
5631
@end ifclear
5632
@ifset bignum-16
5633
a 16-byte integer.  If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
5634
warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
5635
@cindex sixteen-byte integer
5636
@cindex integer, 16-byte
5637
@end ifset
5638
 
5639
@node Reloc
5640
@section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
5641
 
5642
@cindex @code{reloc} directive
5643
Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
5644
@var{expression}.  If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
5645
the current section.  If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
5646
symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
5647
@var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
5648
absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend.  e.g. ELF REL
5649
targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
5650
relocation.  This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
5651
section.
5652
 
5653
@node Rept
5654
@section @code{.rept @var{count}}
5655
 
5656
@cindex @code{rept} directive
5657
Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
5658
@code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
5659
 
5660
For example, assembling
5661
 
5662
@example
5663
        .rept   3
5664
        .long   0
5665
        .endr
5666
@end example
5667
 
5668
is equivalent to assembling
5669
 
5670
@example
5671
        .long   0
5672
        .long   0
5673
        .long   0
5674
@end example
5675
 
5676
@node Sbttl
5677
@section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
5678
 
5679
@cindex @code{sbttl} directive
5680
@cindex subtitles for listings
5681
@cindex listing control: subtitle
5682
Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
5683
title line) when generating assembly listings.
5684
 
5685
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
5686
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
5687
 
5688
@ifset COFF
5689
@node Scl
5690
@section @code{.scl @var{class}}
5691
 
5692
@cindex @code{scl} directive
5693
@cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
5694
@cindex COFF symbol storage class
5695
Set the storage-class value for a symbol.  This directive may only be
5696
used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.  Storage class may flag
5697
whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
5698
symbolic debugging information.
5699
@ifset BOUT
5700
 
5701
The @samp{.scl} directive is primarily associated with COFF output; when
5702
configured to generate @code{b.out} output format, @command{@value{AS}}
5703
accepts this directive but ignores it.
5704
@end ifset
5705
@end ifset
5706
 
5707
@ifset COFF-ELF
5708
@node Section
5709
@section @code{.section @var{name}}
5710
 
5711
@cindex named section
5712
Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
5713
named @var{name}.
5714
 
5715
This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
5716
named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
5717
with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
5718
 
5719
@ifset COFF
5720
@ifset ELF
5721
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5722
@subheading COFF Version
5723
@end ifset
5724
 
5725
@cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
5726
For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
5727
ways:
5728
 
5729
@smallexample
5730
.section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
5731
.section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
5732
@end smallexample
5733
 
5734
If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
5735
section.  Each flag is a single character.  The following flags are recognized:
5736
@table @code
5737
@item b
5738
bss section (uninitialized data)
5739
@item n
5740
section is not loaded
5741
@item w
5742
writable section
5743
@item d
5744
data section
5745
@item r
5746
read-only section
5747
@item x
5748
executable section
5749
@item s
5750
shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
5751
@item a
5752
ignored.  (For compatibility with the ELF version)
5753
@item y
5754
section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
5755
@item 0-9
5756
single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
5757
@end table
5758
 
5759
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5760
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
5761
loaded and writable.  Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
5762
from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
5763
will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
5764
 
5765
If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
5766
taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
5767
@end ifset
5768
 
5769
@ifset ELF
5770
@ifset COFF
5771
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5772
@subheading ELF Version
5773
@end ifset
5774
 
5775
@cindex Section Stack
5776
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
5777
@code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
5778
(@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
5779
@code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
5780
 
5781
@cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
5782
For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
5783
 
5784
@smallexample
5785
.section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
5786
@end smallexample
5787
 
5788
The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
5789
combination of the following characters:
5790
@table @code
5791
@item a
5792
section is allocatable
5793
@item w
5794
section is writable
5795
@item x
5796
section is executable
5797
@item M
5798
section is mergeable
5799
@item S
5800
section contains zero terminated strings
5801
@item G
5802
section is a member of a section group
5803
@item T
5804
section is used for thread-local-storage
5805
@end table
5806
 
5807
The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
5808
@table @code
5809
@item @@progbits
5810
section contains data
5811
@item @@nobits
5812
section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
5813
@item @@note
5814
section contains data which is used by things other than the program
5815
@item @@init_array
5816
section contains an array of pointers to init functions
5817
@item @@fini_array
5818
section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
5819
@item @@preinit_array
5820
section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
5821
@end table
5822
 
5823
Many targets only support the first three section types.
5824
 
5825
Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
5826
ARM) then another character is used instead.  For example the ARM port uses the
5827
@code{%} character.
5828
 
5829
If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5830
be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
5831
 
5832
@smallexample
5833
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
5834
@end smallexample
5835
 
5836
Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
5837
constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
5838
@code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
5839
@var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
5840
the same name, same entity size and same flags.  @var{entsize} must be an
5841
absolute expression.  For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
5842
which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate.  Thus
5843
@code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"};  A reference to the first
5844
@code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
5845
 
5846
If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
5847
be present along with an additional field like this:
5848
 
5849
@smallexample
5850
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5851
@end smallexample
5852
 
5853
The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
5854
particular section belongs.  The optional linkage field can contain:
5855
@table @code
5856
@item comdat
5857
indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
5858
@item .gnu.linkonce
5859
an alias for comdat
5860
@end table
5861
 
5862
Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
5863
the Merge flag should come first, like this:
5864
 
5865
@smallexample
5866
.section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
5867
@end smallexample
5868
 
5869
If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name.  If
5870
the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
5871
none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
5872
executable.  The section will contain data.
5873
 
5874
For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
5875
directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
5876
 
5877
@smallexample
5878
.section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
5879
@end smallexample
5880
 
5881
Note that the section name is quoted.  There may be a sequence of comma
5882
separated flags:
5883
@table @code
5884
@item #alloc
5885
section is allocatable
5886
@item #write
5887
section is writable
5888
@item #execinstr
5889
section is executable
5890
@item #tls
5891
section is used for thread local storage
5892
@end table
5893
 
5894
This directive replaces the current section and subsection.  See the
5895
contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
5896
some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
5897
work.
5898
@end ifset
5899
@end ifset
5900
 
5901
@node Set
5902
@section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5903
 
5904
@cindex @code{set} directive
5905
@cindex symbol value, setting
5906
Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.  This
5907
changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
5908
@var{expression}.  If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
5909
flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
5910
 
5911
You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly.
5912
 
5913
If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
5914
file is the last value stored into it.
5915
 
5916
@ifset HPPA
5917
The syntax for @code{set} on the HPPA is
5918
@samp{@var{symbol} .set @var{expression}}.
5919
@end ifset
5920
 
5921
@ifset Z80
5922
On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use
5923
@samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
5924
@end ifset
5925
 
5926
@node Short
5927
@section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
5928
 
5929
@cindex @code{short} directive
5930
@ifset GENERIC
5931
@code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
5932
@xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
5933
 
5934
In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
5935
numbers of different lengths.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5936
@end ifset
5937
@ifclear GENERIC
5938
@ifset W16
5939
@code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}.  @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
5940
@end ifset
5941
@ifset W32
5942
This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5943
a 16 bit number for each.
5944
@end ifset
5945
@end ifclear
5946
 
5947
@node Single
5948
@section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
5949
 
5950
@cindex @code{single} directive
5951
@cindex floating point numbers (single)
5952
This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas.  It
5953
has the same effect as @code{.float}.
5954
@ifset GENERIC
5955
The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5956
@command{@value{AS}} is configured.  @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5957
@end ifset
5958
@ifclear GENERIC
5959
@ifset IEEEFLOAT
5960
On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
5961
numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
5962
@end ifset
5963
@end ifclear
5964
 
5965
@ifset COFF-ELF
5966
@node Size
5967
@section @code{.size}
5968
 
5969
This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
5970
 
5971
@ifset COFF
5972
@ifset ELF
5973
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5974
@subheading COFF Version
5975
@end ifset
5976
 
5977
@cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
5978
For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
5979
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
5980
 
5981
@smallexample
5982
.size @var{expression}
5983
@end smallexample
5984
 
5985
@ifset BOUT
5986
@samp{.size} is only meaningful when generating COFF format output; when
5987
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
5988
ignores it.
5989
@end ifset
5990
@end ifset
5991
 
5992
@ifset ELF
5993
@ifset COFF
5994
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
5995
@subheading ELF Version
5996
@end ifset
5997
 
5998
@cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
5999
For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6000
 
6001
@smallexample
6002
.size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6003
@end smallexample
6004
 
6005
This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6006
The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6007
arithmetic.  This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6008
symbols.
6009
@end ifset
6010
@end ifset
6011
 
6012
@ifclear no-space-dir
6013
@node Skip
6014
@section @code{.skip @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6015
 
6016
@cindex @code{skip} directive
6017
@cindex filling memory
6018
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6019
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma and
6020
@var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same as
6021
@samp{.space}.
6022
@end ifclear
6023
 
6024
@node Sleb128
6025
@section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6026
 
6027
@cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6028
@var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.''  This is a
6029
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6030
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6031
 
6032
@ifclear no-space-dir
6033
@node Space
6034
@section @code{.space @var{size} , @var{fill}}
6035
 
6036
@cindex @code{space} directive
6037
@cindex filling memory
6038
This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}.  Both
6039
@var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions.  If the comma
6040
and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero.  This is the same
6041
as @samp{.skip}.
6042
 
6043
@ifset HPPA
6044
@quotation
6045
@emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6046
targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute.  See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6047
Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6048
@code{.space} directive.  @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6049
for a summary.
6050
@end quotation
6051
@end ifset
6052
@end ifclear
6053
 
6054
@ifset have-stabs
6055
@node Stab
6056
@section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6057
 
6058
@cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6059
@cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6060
There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6061
All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6062
The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6063
cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6064
Up to five fields are required:
6065
 
6066
@table @var
6067
@item string
6068
This is the symbol's name.  It may contain any character except
6069
@samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names.  Some
6070
debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6071
using this field.
6072
 
6073
@item type
6074
An absolute expression.  The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6075
this expression.  Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6076
and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6077
 
6078
@item other
6079
An absolute expression.  The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6080
low 8 bits of this expression.
6081
 
6082
@item desc
6083
An absolute expression.  The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6084
bits of this expression.
6085
 
6086
@item value
6087
An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
6088
@end table
6089
 
6090
If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
6091
or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
6092
you get a half-formed symbol in your object file.  This is
6093
compatible with earlier assemblers!
6094
 
6095
@table @code
6096
@cindex @code{stabd} directive
6097
@item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
6098
 
6099
The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
6100
It is a null pointer, for compatibility.  Older assemblers used a
6101
null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
6102
strings.
6103
 
6104
The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
6105
relocatably.  When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
6106
is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
6107
assembled.
6108
 
6109
@cindex @code{stabn} directive
6110
@item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6111
The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
6112
 
6113
@cindex @code{stabs} directive
6114
@item .stabs @var{string} ,  @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
6115
All five fields are specified.
6116
@end table
6117
@end ifset
6118
@c end     have-stabs
6119
 
6120
@node String
6121
@section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
6122
"@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
6123
 
6124
@cindex string, copying to object file
6125
@cindex string8, copying to object file
6126
@cindex string16, copying to object file
6127
@cindex string32, copying to object file
6128
@cindex string64, copying to object file
6129
@cindex @code{string} directive
6130
@cindex @code{string8} directive
6131
@cindex @code{string16} directive
6132
@cindex @code{string32} directive
6133
@cindex @code{string64} directive
6134
 
6135
Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file.  You may specify more than
6136
one string to copy, separated by commas.  Unless otherwise specified for a
6137
particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
6138
You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
6139
 
6140
The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
6141
the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
6142
copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively.  The expanded characters
6143
are stored in target endianness byte order.
6144
 
6145
Example:
6146
@smallexample
6147
        .string32 "BYE"
6148
expands to:
6149
        .string   "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0"  /* On little endian targets.  */
6150
        .string   "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E"  /* On big endian targets.  */
6151
@end smallexample
6152
 
6153
 
6154
@node Struct
6155
@section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
6156
 
6157
@cindex @code{struct} directive
6158
Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
6159
which must be an absolute expression.  You might use this as follows:
6160
@smallexample
6161
        .struct 0
6162
field1:
6163
        .struct field1 + 4
6164
field2:
6165
        .struct field2 + 4
6166
field3:
6167
@end smallexample
6168
This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
6169
@code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
6170
value 8.  Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
6171
use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
6172
before further assembly.
6173
 
6174
@ifset ELF
6175
@node SubSection
6176
@section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
6177
 
6178
@cindex @code{subsection} directive
6179
@cindex Section Stack
6180
This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives.  The others are
6181
@code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
6182
@code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6183
(@pxref{Previous}).
6184
 
6185
This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}.  The current
6186
section is not changed.  The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
6187
in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
6188
@end ifset
6189
 
6190
@ifset ELF
6191
@node Symver
6192
@section @code{.symver}
6193
@cindex @code{symver} directive
6194
@cindex symbol versioning
6195
@cindex versions of symbols
6196
Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
6197
within a source file.  This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
6198
typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
6199
There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
6200
into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
6201
shared library.
6202
 
6203
For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
6204
@smallexample
6205
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}
6206
@end smallexample
6207
If the symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
6208
being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
6209
alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
6210
just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
6211
permitted in symbol names.  The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
6212
of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced.  The name @var{name}
6213
itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
6214
have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
6215
file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
6216
function is being mentioned.  The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
6217
the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
6218
building a shared library.  If you are attempting to override a versioned
6219
symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
6220
nodename of the symbol you are trying to override.
6221
 
6222
If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
6223
references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}.  If no
6224
reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
6225
symbol table.
6226
 
6227
Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6228
@smallexample
6229
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
6230
@end smallexample
6231
In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
6232
the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
6233
difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
6234
references to @var{name2} by the linker.
6235
 
6236
The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
6237
@smallexample
6238
.symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
6239
@end smallexample
6240
When @var{name} is not defined within the
6241
file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
6242
@var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
6243
name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
6244
@end ifset
6245
 
6246
@ifset COFF
6247
@node Tag
6248
@section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
6249
 
6250
@cindex COFF structure debugging
6251
@cindex structure debugging, COFF
6252
@cindex @code{tag} directive
6253
This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
6254
information in the symbol table.  It is only permitted inside
6255
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  Tags are used to link structure
6256
definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
6257
@ifset BOUT
6258
 
6259
@samp{.tag} is only used when generating COFF format output; when
6260
@command{@value{AS}} is generating @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but
6261
ignores it.
6262
@end ifset
6263
@end ifset
6264
 
6265
@node Text
6266
@section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
6267
 
6268
@cindex @code{text} directive
6269
Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
6270
the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
6271
expression.  If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
6272
is used.
6273
 
6274
@node Title
6275
@section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
6276
 
6277
@cindex @code{title} directive
6278
@cindex listing control: title line
6279
Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
6280
source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
6281
 
6282
This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6283
it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6284
 
6285
@ifset COFF-ELF
6286
@node Type
6287
@section @code{.type}
6288
 
6289
This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
6290
 
6291
@ifset COFF
6292
@ifset ELF
6293
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6294
@subheading COFF Version
6295
@end ifset
6296
 
6297
@cindex COFF symbol type
6298
@cindex symbol type, COFF
6299
@cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
6300
For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
6301
@code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.  It is used like this:
6302
 
6303
@smallexample
6304
.type @var{int}
6305
@end smallexample
6306
 
6307
This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
6308
entry.
6309
 
6310
@ifset BOUT
6311
@samp{.type} is associated only with COFF format output; when
6312
@command{@value{AS}} is configured for @code{b.out} output, it accepts this
6313
directive but ignores it.
6314
@end ifset
6315
@end ifset
6316
 
6317
@ifset ELF
6318
@ifset COFF
6319
@c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6320
@subheading ELF Version
6321
@end ifset
6322
 
6323
@cindex ELF symbol type
6324
@cindex symbol type, ELF
6325
@cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
6326
For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
6327
 
6328
@smallexample
6329
.type @var{name} , @var{type description}
6330
@end smallexample
6331
 
6332
This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
6333
function symbol or an object symbol.  There are five different syntaxes
6334
supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
6335
compatibility with various other assemblers.
6336
 
6337
Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
6338
@samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
6339
below do not work on all architectures.  The first variant will be accepted by
6340
the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
6341
maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
6342
assemblers.
6343
 
6344
The syntaxes supported are:
6345
 
6346
@smallexample
6347
  .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
6348
  .type <name>,#<type>
6349
  .type <name>,@@<type>
6350
  .type <name>,%<type>
6351
  .type <name>,"<type>"
6352
@end smallexample
6353
 
6354
The types supported are:
6355
 
6356
@table @gcctabopt
6357
@item STT_FUNC
6358
@itemx function
6359
Mark the symbol as being a function name.
6360
 
6361
@item STT_GNU_IFUNC
6362
@itemx gnu_indirect_function
6363
Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
6364
processing.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6365
 
6366
@item STT_OBJECT
6367
@itemx object
6368
Mark the symbol as being a data object.
6369
 
6370
@item STT_TLS
6371
@itemx tls_object
6372
Mark the symbol as being a thead-local data object.
6373
 
6374
@item STT_COMMON
6375
@itemx common
6376
Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
6377
 
6378
@item STT_NOTYPE
6379
@itemx notype
6380
Does not mark the symbol in any way.  It is supported just for completeness.
6381
 
6382
@item gnu_unique_object
6383
Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object.  The dynamic linker
6384
will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
6385
name and type in use.  (This is only supported on Linux targeted assemblers).
6386
 
6387
@end table
6388
 
6389
Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
6390
 
6391
@end ifset
6392
@end ifset
6393
 
6394
@node Uleb128
6395
@section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
6396
 
6397
@cindex @code{uleb128} directive
6398
@var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.''  This is a
6399
compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6400
symbolic debugging format.  @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
6401
 
6402
@ifset COFF
6403
@node Val
6404
@section @code{.val @var{addr}}
6405
 
6406
@cindex @code{val} directive
6407
@cindex COFF value attribute
6408
@cindex value attribute, COFF
6409
This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
6410
records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
6411
entry.
6412
@ifset BOUT
6413
 
6414
@samp{.val} is used only for COFF output; when @command{@value{AS}} is
6415
configured for @code{b.out}, it accepts this directive but ignores it.
6416
@end ifset
6417
@end ifset
6418
 
6419
@ifset ELF
6420
@node Version
6421
@section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
6422
 
6423
@cindex @code{version} directive
6424
This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
6425
formatted note of type NT_VERSION.  The note's name is set to @code{string}.
6426
@end ifset
6427
 
6428
@ifset ELF
6429
@node VTableEntry
6430
@section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
6431
 
6432
@cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
6433
This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
6434
@code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
6435
 
6436
@node VTableInherit
6437
@section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
6438
 
6439
@cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
6440
This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
6441
@code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
6442
parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol.  As a special case the
6443
parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
6444
@end ifset
6445
 
6446
@node Warning
6447
@section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
6448
@cindex warning directive
6449
Similar to the directive @code{.error}
6450
(@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
6451
 
6452
@node Weak
6453
@section @code{.weak @var{names}}
6454
 
6455
@cindex @code{weak} directive
6456
This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6457
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6458
 
6459
On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension.  This
6460
directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
6461
@code{names}.  If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
6462
 
6463
On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
6464
When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
6465
alternate symbol to hold the default value.
6466
 
6467
@node Weakref
6468
@section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
6469
 
6470
@cindex @code{weakref} directive
6471
This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
6472
be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
6473
If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
6474
will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
6475
symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
6476
 
6477
The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
6478
assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
6479
symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
6480
resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
6481
had the references to the alias removed.
6482
 
6483
The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
6484
within the assembler.
6485
 
6486
@node Word
6487
@section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
6488
 
6489
@cindex @code{word} directive
6490
This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
6491
separated by commas.
6492
@ifclear GENERIC
6493
@ifset W32
6494
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
6495
@end ifset
6496
@ifset W16
6497
For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
6498
@end ifset
6499
@end ifclear
6500
@ifset GENERIC
6501
 
6502
The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
6503
depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
6504
@end ifset
6505
 
6506
@c on amd29k, i960, sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
6507
@c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
6508
@ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6509
@cindex difference tables altered
6510
@cindex altered difference tables
6511
@quotation
6512
@emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
6513
@end quotation
6514
 
6515
@ifset GENERIC
6516
Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
6517
addressing, require the following special treatment.  If the machine of
6518
interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
6519
@pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
6520
 
6521
@end ifset
6522
In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
6523
@command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
6524
Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
6525
compilers as part of jump tables.  Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
6526
directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
6527
@code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
6528
creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
6529
This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
6530
first byte after the secondary table.  This short-jump prevents the flow
6531
of control from accidentally falling into the new table.  Inside the
6532
table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}.  The original @samp{.word}
6533
contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
6534
@code{sym2}.
6535
 
6536
If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
6537
secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted.  If there was a
6538
@samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
6539
long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
6540
and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
6541
minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
6542
entries in the original jump table as necessary.
6543
 
6544
@ifset INTERNALS
6545
@emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
6546
@samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
6547
assembly language programmers.
6548
@end ifset
6549
@end ifset
6550
@c end     DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
6551
 
6552
@node Deprecated
6553
@section Deprecated Directives
6554
 
6555
@cindex deprecated directives
6556
@cindex obsolescent directives
6557
One day these directives won't work.
6558
They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
6559
@table @t
6560
@item .abort
6561
@item .line
6562
@end table
6563
 
6564
@ifset ELF
6565
@node Object Attributes
6566
@chapter Object Attributes
6567
@cindex object attributes
6568
 
6569
@command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
6570
into object files for that architecture.  But not all object files are alike.
6571
Many architectures support incompatible variations.  For instance, floating
6572
point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
6573
requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
6574
passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
6575
hardware floating point unit.  Or, if two objects are built for different
6576
generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
6577
newer generation at run-time.
6578
 
6579
This information is useful during and after linking.  At link time,
6580
@command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files.  After link
6581
time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
6582
correctly.
6583
 
6584
Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes.  Each
6585
attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}.  The vendor is a
6586
string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag.  The tag is an integer,
6587
and indicates what property the attribute describes.  The value may be a string
6588
or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object.  Missing
6589
attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
6590
 
6591
Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
6592
The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
6593
 
6594
@menu
6595
* GNU Object Attributes::               @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6596
* Defining New Object Attributes::      Defining New Object Attributes
6597
@end menu
6598
 
6599
@node GNU Object Attributes
6600
@section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
6601
 
6602
The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
6603
with vendor @samp{gnu}.
6604
 
6605
Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
6606
its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
6607
an integer value if the tag number is even.  The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
6608
2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
6609
architecture-dependent ones.
6610
 
6611
@subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
6612
 
6613
These attributes are valid on all architectures.
6614
 
6615
@table @r
6616
@item Tag_compatibility (32)
6617
The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name.  If
6618
the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains.  If it is 1,
6619
then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain.  If it is greater
6620
than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
6621
arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
6622
@end table
6623
 
6624
@subsection MIPS Attributes
6625
 
6626
@table @r
6627
@item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
6628
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6629
 
6630
@itemize @bullet
6631
@item
6632
 
6633
@item
6634
1 for files using the hardware floating-point with a standard double-precision
6635
FPU.
6636
@item
6637
2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
6638
@item
6639
3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6640
@item
6641
4 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit wide
6642
double-precision floating-point registers and 32-bit wide general
6643
purpose registers.
6644
@end itemize
6645
@end table
6646
 
6647
@subsection PowerPC Attributes
6648
 
6649
@table @r
6650
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
6651
The floating-point ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6652
 
6653
@itemize @bullet
6654
@item
6655
 
6656
@item
6657
1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6658
@item
6659
2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
6660
@item
6661
3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
6662
@end itemize
6663
 
6664
@item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
6665
The vector ABI used by this object file.  The value will be:
6666
 
6667
@itemize @bullet
6668
@item
6669
 
6670
@item
6671
1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
6672
@item
6673
2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
6674
@item
6675
3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
6676
@end itemize
6677
@end table
6678
 
6679
@node Defining New Object Attributes
6680
@section Defining New Object Attributes
6681
 
6682
If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
6683
will need to modify.  New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
6684
mailing list.
6685
 
6686
@itemize @bullet
6687
@item
6688
This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
6689
@item
6690
The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
6691
@item
6692
The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
6693
and issue any appropriate link warnings.
6694
@item
6695
Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
6696
@item
6697
@file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
6698
@item
6699
GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
6700
@end itemize
6701
 
6702
@end ifset
6703
 
6704
@ifset GENERIC
6705
@node Machine Dependencies
6706
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6707
 
6708
@cindex machine dependencies
6709
The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
6710
each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs.  Floating point representations
6711
vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
6712
directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
6713
assemblers on a particular platform.  Finally, some versions of
6714
@command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
6715
optimization.
6716
 
6717
This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
6718
include details on any machine's instruction set.  For details on that
6719
subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
6720
 
6721
@menu
6722
@ifset ALPHA
6723
* Alpha-Dependent::             Alpha Dependent Features
6724
@end ifset
6725
@ifset ARC
6726
* ARC-Dependent::               ARC Dependent Features
6727
@end ifset
6728
@ifset ARM
6729
* ARM-Dependent::               ARM Dependent Features
6730
@end ifset
6731
@ifset AVR
6732
* AVR-Dependent::               AVR Dependent Features
6733
@end ifset
6734
@ifset Blackfin
6735
* Blackfin-Dependent::          Blackfin Dependent Features
6736
@end ifset
6737
@ifset CR16
6738
* CR16-Dependent::              CR16 Dependent Features
6739
@end ifset
6740
@ifset CRIS
6741
* CRIS-Dependent::              CRIS Dependent Features
6742
@end ifset
6743
@ifset D10V
6744
* D10V-Dependent::              D10V Dependent Features
6745
@end ifset
6746
@ifset D30V
6747
* D30V-Dependent::              D30V Dependent Features
6748
@end ifset
6749
@ifset H8/300
6750
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6751
@end ifset
6752
@ifset HPPA
6753
* HPPA-Dependent::              HPPA Dependent Features
6754
@end ifset
6755
@ifset I370
6756
* ESA/390-Dependent::           IBM ESA/390 Dependent Features
6757
@end ifset
6758
@ifset I80386
6759
* i386-Dependent::              Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
6760
@end ifset
6761
@ifset I860
6762
* i860-Dependent::              Intel 80860 Dependent Features
6763
@end ifset
6764
@ifset I960
6765
* i960-Dependent::              Intel 80960 Dependent Features
6766
@end ifset
6767
@ifset IA64
6768
* IA-64-Dependent::             Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
6769
@end ifset
6770
@ifset IP2K
6771
* IP2K-Dependent::              IP2K Dependent Features
6772
@end ifset
6773
@ifset LM32
6774
* LM32-Dependent::              LM32 Dependent Features
6775
@end ifset
6776
@ifset M32C
6777
* M32C-Dependent::              M32C Dependent Features
6778
@end ifset
6779
@ifset M32R
6780
* M32R-Dependent::              M32R Dependent Features
6781
@end ifset
6782
@ifset M680X0
6783
* M68K-Dependent::              M680x0 Dependent Features
6784
@end ifset
6785
@ifset M68HC11
6786
* M68HC11-Dependent::           M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
6787
@end ifset
6788
@ifset MICROBLAZE
6789
* MicroBlaze-Dependent::        MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
6790
@end ifset
6791
@ifset MIPS
6792
* MIPS-Dependent::              MIPS Dependent Features
6793
@end ifset
6794
@ifset MMIX
6795
* MMIX-Dependent::              MMIX Dependent Features
6796
@end ifset
6797
@ifset MSP430
6798
* MSP430-Dependent::            MSP430 Dependent Features
6799
@end ifset
6800
@ifset SH
6801
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
6802
* SH64-Dependent::              SuperH SH64 Dependent Features
6803
@end ifset
6804
@ifset PDP11
6805
* PDP-11-Dependent::            PDP-11 Dependent Features
6806
@end ifset
6807
@ifset PJ
6808
* PJ-Dependent::                picoJava Dependent Features
6809
@end ifset
6810
@ifset PPC
6811
* PPC-Dependent::               PowerPC Dependent Features
6812
@end ifset
6813
@ifset S390
6814
* S/390-Dependent::             IBM S/390 Dependent Features
6815
@end ifset
6816
@ifset SCORE
6817
* SCORE-Dependent::             SCORE Dependent Features
6818
@end ifset
6819
@ifset SPARC
6820
* Sparc-Dependent::             SPARC Dependent Features
6821
@end ifset
6822
@ifset TIC54X
6823
* TIC54X-Dependent::            TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
6824
@end ifset
6825
@ifset V850
6826
* V850-Dependent::              V850 Dependent Features
6827
@end ifset
6828
@ifset XTENSA
6829
* Xtensa-Dependent::            Xtensa Dependent Features
6830
@end ifset
6831
@ifset Z80
6832
* Z80-Dependent::               Z80 Dependent Features
6833
@end ifset
6834
@ifset Z8000
6835
* Z8000-Dependent::             Z8000 Dependent Features
6836
@end ifset
6837
@ifset VAX
6838
* Vax-Dependent::               VAX Dependent Features
6839
@end ifset
6840
@end menu
6841
 
6842
@lowersections
6843
@end ifset
6844
 
6845
@c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
6846
@c in single-cpu versions.  This is mainly achieved by @lowersections.  There is a
6847
@c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
6848
@c "Machine Dependencies".  Hence the conditional nodenames in each
6849
@c major node below.  Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
6850
@c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
6851
@c in both conditional blocks.
6852
 
6853
@ifset ALPHA
6854
@include c-alpha.texi
6855
@end ifset
6856
 
6857
@ifset ARC
6858
@include c-arc.texi
6859
@end ifset
6860
 
6861
@ifset ARM
6862
@include c-arm.texi
6863
@end ifset
6864
 
6865
@ifset AVR
6866
@include c-avr.texi
6867
@end ifset
6868
 
6869
@ifset Blackfin
6870
@include c-bfin.texi
6871
@end ifset
6872
 
6873
@ifset CR16
6874
@include c-cr16.texi
6875
@end ifset
6876
 
6877
@ifset CRIS
6878
@include c-cris.texi
6879
@end ifset
6880
 
6881
@ifset Renesas-all
6882
@ifclear GENERIC
6883
@node Machine Dependencies
6884
@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6885
 
6886
The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
6887
and there are also some syntax differences among the families.  This
6888
chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
6889
family.
6890
 
6891
@menu
6892
* H8/300-Dependent::            Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
6893
* SH-Dependent::                Renesas SH Dependent Features
6894
@end menu
6895
@lowersections
6896
@end ifclear
6897
@end ifset
6898
 
6899
@ifset D10V
6900
@include c-d10v.texi
6901
@end ifset
6902
 
6903
@ifset D30V
6904
@include c-d30v.texi
6905
@end ifset
6906
 
6907
@ifset H8/300
6908
@include c-h8300.texi
6909
@end ifset
6910
 
6911
@ifset HPPA
6912
@include c-hppa.texi
6913
@end ifset
6914
 
6915
@ifset I370
6916
@include c-i370.texi
6917
@end ifset
6918
 
6919
@ifset I80386
6920
@include c-i386.texi
6921
@end ifset
6922
 
6923
@ifset I860
6924
@include c-i860.texi
6925
@end ifset
6926
 
6927
@ifset I960
6928
@include c-i960.texi
6929
@end ifset
6930
 
6931
@ifset IA64
6932
@include c-ia64.texi
6933
@end ifset
6934
 
6935
@ifset IP2K
6936
@include c-ip2k.texi
6937
@end ifset
6938
 
6939
@ifset LM32
6940
@include c-lm32.texi
6941
@end ifset
6942
 
6943
@ifset M32C
6944
@include c-m32c.texi
6945
@end ifset
6946
 
6947
@ifset M32R
6948
@include c-m32r.texi
6949
@end ifset
6950
 
6951
@ifset M680X0
6952
@include c-m68k.texi
6953
@end ifset
6954
 
6955
@ifset M68HC11
6956
@include c-m68hc11.texi
6957
@end ifset
6958
 
6959
@ifset MICROBLAZE
6960
@include c-microblaze.texi
6961
@end ifset
6962
 
6963
@ifset MIPS
6964
@include c-mips.texi
6965
@end ifset
6966
 
6967
@ifset MMIX
6968
@include c-mmix.texi
6969
@end ifset
6970
 
6971
@ifset MSP430
6972
@include c-msp430.texi
6973
@end ifset
6974
 
6975
@ifset NS32K
6976
@include c-ns32k.texi
6977
@end ifset
6978
 
6979
@ifset PDP11
6980
@include c-pdp11.texi
6981
@end ifset
6982
 
6983
@ifset PJ
6984
@include c-pj.texi
6985
@end ifset
6986
 
6987
@ifset PPC
6988
@include c-ppc.texi
6989
@end ifset
6990
 
6991
@ifset S390
6992
@include c-s390.texi
6993
@end ifset
6994
 
6995
@ifset SCORE
6996
@include c-score.texi
6997
@end ifset
6998
 
6999
@ifset SH
7000
@include c-sh.texi
7001
@include c-sh64.texi
7002
@end ifset
7003
 
7004
@ifset SPARC
7005
@include c-sparc.texi
7006
@end ifset
7007
 
7008
@ifset TIC54X
7009
@include c-tic54x.texi
7010
@end ifset
7011
 
7012
@ifset Z80
7013
@include c-z80.texi
7014
@end ifset
7015
 
7016
@ifset Z8000
7017
@include c-z8k.texi
7018
@end ifset
7019
 
7020
@ifset VAX
7021
@include c-vax.texi
7022
@end ifset
7023
 
7024
@ifset V850
7025
@include c-v850.texi
7026
@end ifset
7027
 
7028
@ifset XTENSA
7029
@include c-xtensa.texi
7030
@end ifset
7031
 
7032
@ifset GENERIC
7033
@c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
7034
@raisesections
7035
@end ifset
7036
 
7037
@node Reporting Bugs
7038
@chapter Reporting Bugs
7039
@cindex bugs in assembler
7040
@cindex reporting bugs in assembler
7041
 
7042
Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
7043
 
7044
Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
7045
not.  But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
7046
entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
7047
Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
7048
 
7049
In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7050
information that enables us to fix the bug.
7051
 
7052
@menu
7053
* Bug Criteria::                Have you found a bug?
7054
* Bug Reporting::               How to report bugs
7055
@end menu
7056
 
7057
@node Bug Criteria
7058
@section Have You Found a Bug?
7059
@cindex bug criteria
7060
 
7061
If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7062
 
7063
@itemize @bullet
7064
@cindex fatal signal
7065
@cindex assembler crash
7066
@cindex crash of assembler
7067
@item
7068
If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
7069
@command{@value{AS}} bug.  Reliable assemblers never crash.
7070
 
7071
@cindex error on valid input
7072
@item
7073
If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
7074
 
7075
@cindex invalid input
7076
@item
7077
If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
7078
is a bug.  However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
7079
be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
7080
 
7081
@item
7082
If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
7083
of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
7084
@end itemize
7085
 
7086
@node Bug Reporting
7087
@section How to Report Bugs
7088
@cindex bug reports
7089
@cindex assembler bugs, reporting
7090
 
7091
A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products.  If
7092
you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
7093
contact that organization first.
7094
 
7095
You can find contact information for many support companies and
7096
individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7097
distribution.
7098
 
7099
@ifset BUGURL
7100
In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
7101
to @value{BUGURL}.
7102
@end ifset
7103
 
7104
The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7105
@strong{report all the facts}.  If you are not sure whether to state a
7106
fact or leave it out, state it!
7107
 
7108
Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
7109
and assume that some details do not matter.  Thus, you might assume that the
7110
name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter.  Well, probably it does
7111
not, but one cannot be sure.  Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
7112
happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
7113
perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
7114
the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug.  Play it safe and
7115
give a specific, complete example.  That is the easiest thing for you to do,
7116
and the most helpful.
7117
 
7118
Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
7119
it is new to us.  Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
7120
that the bug has not been reported previously.
7121
 
7122
Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
7123
bell?''  This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless.  We
7124
respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7125
You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
7126
 
7127
To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7128
 
7129
@itemize @bullet
7130
@item
7131
The version of @command{@value{AS}}.  @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
7132
it with the @samp{--version} argument.
7133
 
7134
Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
7135
the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
7136
 
7137
@item
7138
Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
7139
 
7140
@item
7141
The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7142
version number.
7143
 
7144
@item
7145
What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
7146
``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7147
 
7148
@item
7149
The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
7150
observe the bug.  To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
7151
all.  A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
7152
 
7153
If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7154
and then we might not encounter the bug.
7155
 
7156
@item
7157
A complete input file that will reproduce the bug.  If the bug is observed when
7158
the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
7159
high level language source.  Most compilers will produce the assembler source
7160
when run with the @samp{-S} option.  If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
7161
the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
7162
file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
7163
@command{@value{AS}} is being run.
7164
 
7165
@item
7166
A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7167
incorrect.  For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7168
 
7169
Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
7170
will certainly notice it.  But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
7171
notice unless it is glaringly wrong.  You might as well not give us a chance to
7172
make a mistake.
7173
 
7174
Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
7175
explicitly.  Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
7176
@command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
7177
library on your system.  (This has happened!)  Your copy might crash and ours
7178
would not.  If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
7179
would know that the bug was not happening for us.  If you had not told us to
7180
expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
7181
observations.
7182
 
7183
@item
7184
If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
7185
diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
7186
option.  Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.  If you even
7187
discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
7188
by line number.
7189
 
7190
The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7191
sources.  Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7192
@end itemize
7193
 
7194
Here are some things that are not necessary:
7195
 
7196
@itemize @bullet
7197
@item
7198
A description of the envelope of the bug.
7199
 
7200
Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7201
which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7202
changes will not affect it.
7203
 
7204
This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7205
will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7206
with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7207
We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7208
 
7209
Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7210
of the original one, that is a convenience for us.  Errors in the
7211
output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7212
less time, and so on.
7213
 
7214
However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7215
report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7216
 
7217
@item
7218
A patch for the bug.
7219
 
7220
A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one.  But do not omit
7221
the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7222
a patch is all we need.  We might see problems with your patch and decide
7223
to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7224
 
7225
Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
7226
construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
7227
the code.  If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
7228
one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
7229
 
7230
And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7231
patch should be an improvement, we will not install it.  A test case will
7232
help us to understand.
7233
 
7234
@item
7235
A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7236
 
7237
Such guesses are usually wrong.  Even we cannot guess right about such
7238
things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7239
@end itemize
7240
 
7241
@node Acknowledgements
7242
@chapter Acknowledgements
7243
 
7244
If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
7245
it is not meant as a slight.  We just don't know about it.  Send mail to the
7246
maintainer, and we'll correct the situation.  Currently
7247
@c (January 1994),
7248
the maintainer is Ken Raeburn (email address @code{raeburn@@cygnus.com}).
7249
 
7250
Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
7251
more details?}
7252
 
7253
Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
7254
information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
7255
extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
7256
 
7257
K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
7258
many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
7259
up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
7260
testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
7261
including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
7262
and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
7263
support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
7264
port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
7265
file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
7266
assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
7267
 
7268
Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
7269
in format-specific I/O modules.
7270
 
7271
The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan.  Eric Youngdale
7272
has done much work with it since.
7273
 
7274
The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
7275
 
7276
Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
7277
 
7278
The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
7279
University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
7280
 
7281
Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
7282
(@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
7283
(which hasn't been merged in yet).  Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
7284
support a.out format.
7285
 
7286
Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
7287
tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
7288
Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support.  Steve also modified the COFF back end to
7289
use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
7290
targets.
7291
 
7292
John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
7293
simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives.  He
7294
updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
7295
fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
7296
remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}).  John fixed many bugs, including true tested
7297
cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
7298
required the proverbial one-bit fix.
7299
 
7300
Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
7301
68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
7302
added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
7303
PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
7304
 
7305
Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
7306
 
7307
Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
7308
 
7309
Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
7310
along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
7311
formats).  This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
7312
the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
7313
 
7314
Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
7315
Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
7316
Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
7317
Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
7318
and some initial 64-bit support).
7319
 
7320
Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
7321
 
7322
Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
7323
support for openVMS/Alpha.
7324
 
7325
Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
7326
flavors.
7327
 
7328
David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
7329
Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
7330
 
7331
Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
7332
configuration enhancements.
7333
 
7334
Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
7335
 
7336
Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements.  If
7337
you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
7338
want to be, let us know.  Some of the history has been lost; we are not
7339
intentionally leaving anyone out.
7340
 
7341
@node GNU Free Documentation License
7342
@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
7343
@include fdl.texi
7344
 
7345
@node AS Index
7346
@unnumbered AS Index
7347
 
7348
@printindex cp
7349
 
7350
@bye
7351
@c Local Variables:
7352
@c fill-column: 79
7353
@c End:

powered by: WebSVN 2.1.0

© copyright 1999-2024 OpenCores.org, equivalent to Oliscience, all rights reserved. OpenCores®, registered trademark.